JP2008295678A - Game machine - Google Patents

Abstract

<P>PROBLEM TO BE SOLVED: To suppress a failure caused when the inside of a game machine becomes a high temperature. <P>SOLUTION: At the center part of the game area 37 of a game board 5, a center accessory 300 is arranged. The center accessory 300 has such a size that it occupies 2/3 or more of the width of the game area 37. The center accessory 300 has a roughly rectangular opening 301, and a performance display device 115 is arranged on the rear side of the opening 301. The center accessory 300 is also provided with a frame-like decorative body 370, and the frame-like decorative body 370 is provided along the opening edge of the opening 301. Such a game board 5 is housed in the housing space of a main body frame, and a blowing control means for sending out cooled air to the housing space is included especially. <P>COPYRIGHT: (C)2009,JPO&INPIT

Description

  The present invention relates to a gaming machine such as a pachinko gaming machine (generally also referred to as a “pachinko machine”).

  Conventionally, a gaming machine such as a pachinko machine has a gaming board in which a gaming area is formed. Then, for example, a game ball as a game medium is driven toward a game area formed on the game board. The game balls that are driven into the game area flow down along the game board. In the game area, a number of obstacle nails are provided in a predetermined gauge arrangement, and a windmill is provided at an appropriate position in the game area. In addition, the game area is provided with a start port through which a game ball driven toward the game area can be won.

  As an example of this type of gaming machine, there is a gaming machine called a digipachi. In this gaming machine, a game ball as a game medium wins at the start opening, and a lottery is drawn, and the result is displayed on a liquid crystal display or the like. If this lottery is won, a jackpot game is generated in which a large amount of balls can be obtained. In such a gaming machine, the main board performs lottery lottery, and the peripheral board performs display on a liquid crystal display or the like. It is known that a CPU or the like is mounted on the main board or the peripheral board and generates heat when the processing program is executed. Therefore, conventionally, there is a gaming machine in which a blower such as a fan is provided for each board (see, for example, Patent Document 1).

JP 2004-267442 A

  However, in the prior art, since a blower is provided for each board individually, heat is not always released to the outside of the gaming machine, and heat still remains inside the gaming machine, May become hot. Moreover, it cannot be denied that the conventional blower has insufficient cooling capacity. In the technique described in the above publication, the heat inside the cover member is released, but the control board is released outside through the inside of the control board box attached to the back side of the cover member. There is a risk that the cooling of the battery becomes insufficient. Furthermore, since the game board is provided with a drive device such as a solenoid, a liquid crystal display, and the like, there is a possibility that heat is generated also in this portion. As a result, if a high temperature portion is generated inside the gaming machine, there is a concern that a problem such as adversely affecting the control processing of the main board or the like may occur.

  The present invention has been made to solve the above-described problems, and an object of the present invention is to suppress problems caused by the high temperature inside the gaming machine.

  The gaming machine of the present invention has an outer frame formed in a vertically long rectangular shape, a main body frame that is pivotally supported on one side of the front surface of the outer frame, and is detachably attached to the rear surface of the main body frame. A cover member that forms an accommodation space with the main body frame, a game board having a game board portion that is accommodated in the accommodation space and in which a game area is mainly formed, and a shot for driving a game ball toward the game area A device, an operating means for instructing the game ball to be driven by the launching device, a start port provided in the game area, into which a game ball can enter, and provided near the start port and controlled to be released. A movable member that promotes the entry of the game ball into the start port, a movable member driving means that opens and closes the movable member provided on the back side of the game board portion, and is provided in the game area. It is difficult to accept the closed state and the closed state A special winning opening that can be changed to an open state in which the game ball can be received more easily, a special winning opening driving means that opens and closes the special winning opening provided on the back side of the game board portion, and the back of the game board. An effect display device that is provided on the side and displays an effect display including a variation display of a decorative pattern, a start determination unit that determines whether or not a game ball has entered the start port, and a game by the start determination unit When the winning of the ball is determined, the lottery means for performing an internal lottery, and when the lottery by the lottery means is won, the special prize opening driving means is operated to open and close the special prize opening. A main control means having at least a special game execution means for executing the game, and an effect display system that is wired to the main control means and performs an effect display according to a lottery result by the lottery means via the effect display device. Sub-control means having at least means, a main control box attached to the back side of the game board in a state in which the main control means is accommodated, and a back side of the game board in a state in which the sub-control means is accommodated A control unit having at least a sub-control box to be attached; a blower means that is provided on the front side of the control unit in the game board and that creates a flow of air; and a heat-absorbing and radiating means that can cool the air from the blower means The sub-control unit includes a blow control unit that controls the blower unit, controls the heat absorbing / dissipating unit, and sends out the cooled air to the accommodation space.

  In the present invention, there are a movable member driving means and a special prize opening driving means on the back side of the game board portion, and a liquid crystal display device and a control unit are on the back side of the game board. The control unit has at least a main control box that houses the main control means and a sub control box that houses the sub control means. Such a game board is accommodated in an accommodation space formed by a main body frame and a cover member. A cover member is detachably attached to the back surface of the main body frame. When the cover member is attached to the back surface of the main body frame, a space is formed between the main body frame and the cover member. In the present invention, this space is referred to as a housing space. In this housing space, the liquid crystal display device and the control unit are housed. In other words, the game board is housed between the side walls of the main body frame, and the cover member is attached to the back side of the main body frame. At this time, both the liquid crystal display device and the control unit are housed in the housing space together with the game board. Therefore, although the back surface is not usually sealed with the cover member, there is a possibility that heat may stay between the cover member and the back surface of the game board. In this regard, in the present invention, the air blowing means is disposed on the front side of the control unit. Moreover, the heat absorption / radiation means which can cool the air from a ventilation means was provided. Here, in particular, the blower control unit controls the blower unit and the heat absorbing / dissipating unit, and the cooled air is sent out to the accommodation space. As a result, heat retention on the back side of the gaming board can be suppressed, and problems caused by the high temperature inside the gaming machine can be suppressed.

  The configuration for sending out the cooled air to the accommodation space includes a configuration for sending out air toward the control unit and a configuration for sending out air toward the effect display device. The cooled air moves through the high temperature portion, thereby depriving the heat of the high temperature portion. Therefore, the flow path of the cooled air may be formed by a laminated component including at least the control unit on the back side of the game board. In this sense, “the cooled air sent out by the air blowing control means passes through a flow path formed by a laminated component on the back side of the game board including at least the control unit, and is outside the accommodation space. It may be "to be discharged". Further, in view of the fact that the heat generating members (main control box, sub control box, effect display device, etc.) that generate heat are arranged on the back side of the game board, “the cooled air sent out by the air blowing control means” May be discharged to the outside of the accommodation space after exchanging heat with a heat-generating member that generates heat or a high-temperature member that retains heat.

  According to the present invention, it is possible to suppress problems caused by high temperature inside the gaming machine.

  Hereinafter, a gaming machine (hereinafter simply referred to as a “pachinko machine”) according to an embodiment of the present invention will be described with reference to the drawings.

[Overall configuration of pachinko machine]
This will be described with reference to FIGS. FIG. 1 is a perspective view showing a state in which a main body frame is opened on one side of an outer frame of a pachinko machine and a front frame is opened on one side of the main body frame. FIG. 2 is a front view showing the entire front side of the pachinko machine. In FIG. 1 and FIG. 2, the decorative members in the game area are omitted.

  The pachinko machine 1 includes an outer frame 2, a main body frame 3, a front frame 4, a game board 5, and the like. The outer frame 2 is formed into a vertically long rectangular frame shape by upper, lower, left, and right wooden frame members, and has a lower receiving plate 6 that receives the lower surface of the main body frame 3 at the front lower portion of the outer frame 2. A main body frame 3 is attached to one side of the entire surface of the outer frame 2 by a hinge mechanism 7 so as to be opened and closed forward. The outer frame 2 may be formed of a light metal such as resin or aluminum.

[About the frame structure]
This will be described with reference to FIGS. FIG. 3 is a perspective view showing the main frame of the pachinko machine and the game board separated from the front right and diagonally.

  The main body frame 3 is configured by integrally molding the front frame body 11, the game board mounting frame 12 and the mechanism mounting body 13 with a synthetic resin or the like. The front frame body 11 of the main body frame 3 is formed in a rectangular frame shape having a size corresponding to the outer shape excluding the support plate 6 on the front side of the outer frame 2 (see FIG. 1). A body frame side hinge device 15 is fixed to the upper and lower portions of one side of the front frame body 11, and hinge pins and hinge holes are provided to the outer frame side hinge device 14 fixed to the upper and lower portions of one side of the outer frame 2. It is mounted so that it can be opened and closed freely. That is, the hinge mechanism 7 is constituted by the outer frame side hinge device 14, the main body frame side hinge device 15, the hinge pin, and the hinge hole.

  On the front side of the front frame body 11, a speaker box portion 16 is integrally formed in the front lower left area of the front frame body 11 positioned below the game board mounting frame 12, and is formed in the front opening portion of the speaker box portion 16. The speaker mounting plate 17 is mounted so as to close the opening. A speaker 18 is mounted on the speaker mounting plate 17.

  In the lower region of the front surface of the front frame 11, a firing rail 19 is attached to the upper half of the front frame 11 in an inclined manner. A lower front plate 30 is mounted on the lower half of the lower area of the front surface of the front frame 11. A lower tray 31 capable of storing game balls is provided at a substantially central portion of the front surface of the lower front plate 30, an operation handle 32 is provided on the right side, and an ashtray 33 is provided on the left side. . The lower plate 31 is provided with a ball discharge lever 34 for discharging the game ball downward.

[About front frame configuration]
This will be described with reference to FIGS. The front frame 4 is mounted on one side of the front surface of the front frame body 11 so as to cover a portion extending from the upper end of the front frame body 11 to the upper edge of the lower front plate 30 so as to be opened and closed forward by a hinge mechanism 36. Yes.

  A substantially circular opening window 38 through which the game area 37 of the game board 5 can be seen through from the front is formed at a substantially central portion of the front frame 4. A window frame 39 having a rectangular frame shape larger than the opening window 38 is provided on the rear side of the front frame 4, and a transparent plate 50 such as a glass plate or a transparent resin plate is attached to the window frame 39. A substantially entire front surface of the front frame 4 is decorated by a front decoration member in which a lamp or the like is provided, and an upper plate 51 is formed at a lower portion of the front surface of the front frame 4. Specifically, in the periphery of the opening window 38, side decoration devices 52 are mounted on the left and right sides, an upper plate 51 is mounted on the lower portion, and an acoustic lighting device 53 is mounted on the upper portion.

  The side decoration device 52 is mainly configured by a side decoration body 54 in which a lamp driving substrate is disposed and formed of a synthetic resin material. A plurality of slit-like opening holes that are long in the horizontal direction are arranged in the side decoration body 54 in the vertical direction, and a lens 55 corresponding to the light source disposed on the lamp driving substrate is incorporated in the opening hole. The acoustic illumination device 53 includes a transparent cover body 56, a speaker 57, a speaker cover 58, a reflector body (not shown), and the like, and these constituent members are assembled together to form a unit.

  An effect selection switch 60 is provided on the left side of the front surface of the upper plate 51. The effect selection switch 60 is configured to be pressed by the player himself. When the player depresses the effect selection switch 60, the player's intention can be reflected in the effect display on the effect display device 115 described later. It should be noted that a lever or a button may be used instead of the effect selection switch 60. Moreover, the voice input means which receives a player's voice may be sufficient. In other words, any device that reflects the player's intention is acceptable.

[Configuration of locking device]
This will be described with reference to FIGS. 1 and 3. A function of locking the main body frame 3 with respect to the outer frame 2 and a function of locking the front frame 4 with respect to the main body frame 3 on the rear side of the free end side opposite to the hinge mechanism 36 of the front frame body 11 The locking device 70 having both of the above is mounted.

  That is, in this embodiment, the locking device 70 includes a plurality of upper and lower body frame locking hooks 72 that are detachably engaged with a closing tool 71 provided on the outer frame 2 to lock the body frame 3 in a closed state, From the front of the pachinko machine 1, a plurality of upper and lower door locking hooks 74 that are detachably engaged with a closing tool 73 provided on the rear side of the free end side of the front frame 4 to lock the front frame 4 in a closed state. And a cylinder lock 75 exposed through the front frame body 11 and the lower front plate 30 so that the key can be inserted and unlocked. Then, a key is inserted into the key hole of the cylinder lock 75 and rotated in one direction, so that the engagement between the main body frame locking hook 72 and the closing tool 71 of the outer frame 2 is released, and the main body frame 3 is unlocked. By rotating in the opposite direction, the engagement between the door locking hook 74 and the closing tool 73 of the front frame 4 is released and the front frame 4 is unlocked.

[About the structure of the game board mounting frame]
A description will be given with reference to FIGS. 1, 3 and 4. FIG. 4 is a rear view showing the entire rear side of the pachinko machine. As shown in FIGS. 1 and 3, the game board mounting frame 12 of the main body frame 3 is provided on the rear side of the front frame body 11 and the game board 5 is mounted so as to be attachable / detachable from the front. .

  The game board 5 is formed in a substantially square plate shape with a size that fits from the front of the game board mounting frame 12 (see FIG. 10). A guide rail 78 including an outer rail 76 and an inner rail 77 is provided on the board surface (front surface) of the game board 5, and a game area 37 is defined inside the guide rail 78.

  A predetermined gap is provided between the launch rail 19 and the guide rail 78, and when the launched game ball returns to the guide rail 78, the game ball is discharged from the gap. The lower plate 31 is guided.

  Further, a front structural member 79 made of synthetic resin is attached to the front surface of the game board 5 in the outer region of the guide rail 78.

  On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 4, the lower part on the rear side of the game board 5 receives a game ball that has flowed into the various winning devices in a portion extending from the center part to the lower part, and serves as a collective bag for guiding the game ball to a predetermined position. A box mounting base 118 having both the above function and the function as a box mounting portion is provided.

  A sub-control board box 130 in which a sub-control board 119 such as a sound control board and a lamp control board is housed is mounted on the box mounting base 118, and is superposed on the rear side of the sub-control board box 130. A main control board box 132 in which the control board 131 is housed is mounted.

  Further, in a state where the box mounting base 118, the sub control board box 130 and the main control board box 132 are respectively mounted on the rear side of the game board 5, the game board 5 is moved from the front of the game board mounting frame 12 of the main body frame 3. The box mounting base 118, the sub control board box 130, and the main control board box 132 are arranged so as not to protrude outward from the outline of the game board 5 so that they can be fitted and installed.

[Configuration of body frame mechanism mounting body, ball tank and tank rail]
This will be described with reference to FIGS. FIG. 7 is a perspective view showing the state in which various members are assembled to the main body frame of the pachinko machine from diagonally upper right rear, and FIG. 8 is a perspective view showing the main body frame from diagonally upper right rear.

  A tank mounting portion 133, a rail mounting portion 134, a dispensing device mounting portion 135, and the like are formed on the mechanism mounting body 13 of the main body frame 3, and a ball tank 136 is mounted on the tank mounting portion 133.

  The ball tank 136 is made of a transparent synthetic resin material, and is formed in a box shape opening upward so that a large number of game balls supplied from the island facility can be stored. The storage state of the game balls in the ball tank 136 is visible through the rear side wall of the ball tank 136.

  In addition, a discharge port 138 for discharging a game ball is formed at the rear corner of the bottom plate portion 137 of the ball tank 136, and the bottom plate portion 137 is formed on an inclined surface that is inclined downward toward the discharge port 138. .

  The mechanism mounting body 13 of the main body frame 3 is integrally formed with a rail mounting portion 134 so as to approach the tank mounting portion 133 downward, and the rail component 139 is mounted on the rail mounting portion 134 so that the tank rail 150 is configured. That is, in this embodiment, the rail mounting portion 134 is formed in a state in which the upper lateral portion of the main body frame 3 is recessed by a predetermined depth, and the rear side wall of the recess is used as the front wall portion 151 of the tank rail 150. An inclined rail shelf 155 is formed along the lower edge of the concave portion so as to incline downward from one end (left side in FIG. 8) to the other end (right end in FIG. 8). An upward surface extending in the lateral direction of the rail shelf 155 is a rail receiving portion 158.

  The rail constituting member 139 that is mounted on the rail mounting portion 134 and constitutes the tank rail 150 includes a rear wall portion 152 that forms a rail passage between the rail mounting portion 134 and the front wall portion 151, and an inclined lower plate And a partition wall (both not shown) that project along the center in the front-rear direction on the upper surface of the lower plate part and divide the rail passage into front and rear rows (in this embodiment, front and rear rows). It is formed in preparation.

  In the present embodiment, the “front-rear direction” means a direction orthogonal to the surface of the game board 5, that is, a front-rear direction viewed from the player.

  The rail constituting member 139 is attached to the rail attaching portion 134 by an appropriate attachment means, whereby the tank rail 150 having a plurality of front and rear rail passages is configured. Then, after the game balls discharged from the discharge port 138 of the ball tank 136 (dropped by its own weight) are received at one end of the rail passages in the front and rear rows of the tank rail 150, the game balls are moved along the rail passage by their own weight. And rolling toward the other end of the rail passage.

  Further, in this embodiment, the rail component member 139 is formed of a transparent synthetic resin material, whereby the flow state of the game balls in the rail passage is visually recognized through the rear wall portion 152 of the rail component member 139. It is possible.

  The front wall portion 151 of the tank rail 150 (rail mounting portion 134) has a first space portion in order to avoid interference with the rear upper end portion of equipment (for example, the center accessory 300) that protrudes to the rear side of the game board 5. It is provided in a separated state.

  In this embodiment, the rear end of the rail shelf 155 serving as the rear end portion of the main body frame 3 and the rear wall portion of the tank rail 150 are substantially flush with the rear side wall of the ball tank 136. In other words, the tank rail 150 is arranged rearwardly from the rear surface of the game board 5 until the rear wall portion of the ball tank 136 is substantially flush with the rear wall portion of the ball tank 136. Thus, a first space portion for avoiding interference with the rear portion of the center accessory 300 is provided between the rear side of the game board 5 and the front wall portion 151 of the tank rail 150.

  Above the tank rail 150, a rectifier 156 for aligning the game balls flowing in the rail passage without overlapping each other is mounted on the upper portion thereof so as to be swingable about the shaft 157. The rectifier 156 is provided with a weight from the center to the bottom.

[Configuration of payout device mounting part and ball payout device]
This will be described with reference to FIGS. A vertically long paying device mounting portion 135 corresponding to a ball paying device (ball paying unit) 170 described below is formed in the vertical direction of one side of the mechanism mounting body 13 of the main body frame 3. The dispensing device mounting portion 135 is formed in a concave shape having an opening on the rear side.

  In addition, an opening 173 through which a payout motor 172 (see FIG. 3) of the ball payout device 170 can project is formed at a predetermined position of a back wall portion (not shown) having a stepped shape of the payout device mounting portion 135. Yes.

  In a state where the ball paying device 170 is mounted in the recess of the paying device mounting portion 135, a second space portion is provided between the game board 5 and the first space portion, which is at substantially the same level in the front-rear direction. . Thus, the rail passage and the ball passage are arranged at substantially the same level in the front-rear direction.

  Further, the rear end of the body frame 3, that is, the rear end of the peripheral wall portion of the dispensing device mounting portion 135, the rear end of the rail shelf 155, the rear surfaces of the ball tank 136, the tank rail 150, and the ball dispensing device 170 are substantially the same surface. There is no.

  The ball payout device 170 has a vertically long box shape that is substantially the same size as the recess of the payout device mounting portion 135, and is unitized by mounting various parts related to payout.

  The ball payout device 170 is fitted from the rear opening of the recess of the payout device mounting portion 135 and is mounted by appropriate mounting means (for example, mounting means such as an elastic clip, a locking claw, and a screw). ing.

  Although not shown, the ball dispensing device 170 is formed by dividing the ball passages having inflow ports respectively communicating with the outlets of the rail passages in the tank rail 150 into a plurality of front and rear rows (for example, front and rear rows). Further, the downstream portions of the front and rear rows of ball passages formed in the interior are bifurcated to form front and rear rows of award balls, a ball rental ball passage, and a ball removal ball passage. A payout member (not shown) made of a rotating body for distributing and paying out game balls to any of the passages is rotated in the forward and reverse directions at the branch portion between the winning ball and the ball passage for lending and the ball passage for ball removal. It is arranged to be possible.

[Equipment on the lower rear of the main frame]
This will be described with reference to FIGS. On the rear side of the front frame 11 of the main body frame 3, on one side (left side in FIG. 4) of the rear lower region of the front frame 11 positioned below the game board mounting frame 12, A launching device unit in which a launching hammer (not shown) for launching a game ball sent to the launching position of the tilted end, a launching motor 192 for differentially launching the launching hammer, and the like are assembled to the mounting substrate 193 and unitized. 194 is installed.

  A power supply board box 196 for receiving the power supply board 195 is mounted at a substantially central portion of the rear lower region of the front frame body 11, and the dispensing control board 197 is received in a state of being superimposed on the rear side of the power supply board box 196. A payout control board box 198 is mounted.

  The payout control board 197 includes a RAM for storing the number of game balls to be paid out, and transmits a control signal for paying out game balls in accordance with a payout signal transmitted from the main control board 131 to a relay circuit board (not shown). Thus, the operation of the payout motor 172 is controlled.

[Configuration of rear cover body]
This will be described with reference to FIGS. FIG. 5 is a perspective view showing the entire rear side of the pachinko machine from the upper right rear.

  The rear end portions of the display device control board box 117 (see FIG. 9) and the main control board box 132 arranged on the rear surface of the game board 5 protrude toward the window opening portion opened in the center portion of the mechanism mounting body 13. .

  Between the side wall portion constituting one side wall of the window opening portion of the mechanism mounting body 13 and the one side wall of the dispensing device mounting portion 135 constituting the other end wall, an opaque synthetic resin material is formed into a substantially square box shape. Then, the rear cover body 210 is detachably mounted by a cover hinge mechanism 211.

  The rear cover body 210 is configured integrally with a substantially rectangular rear wall portion 212 and a peripheral wall portion 213 that protrudes forward from the outer peripheral edge of the rear wall portion 212. Of the peripheral wall portion 213 of the rear cover body 210, the one side wall portion 213 a is respectively viewed from above the hinge holes of the hinge body 214 formed at a total of three locations above and below the rear wall portion of the mechanism mounting body 13. A hinge body 216 having a hinge pin 215 that is detachably fitted downward is integrally formed.

  Further, of the peripheral wall portion 213 of the rear cover body 210, the other wall portion 213b has a locking claw that can be elastically engaged with a locking hole formed in one side wall of the dispensing device mounting portion 135. An elastic closing body 217 is integrally formed.

  That is, in the rear cover body 210, the hinge pins 215 of the upper and lower and intermediate hinge bodies 216 are respectively fitted from above the hinge holes of the hinge body 214 of the side wall portion of the mechanism mounting body 13. In this state, the rear cover body 210 is rotated toward the other side of the mechanism mounting body 13 around the hinge pin 215, and the elastic closing body 217 is inserted into the locking hole on one side wall of the dispensing device mounting portion 135. The rear cover body 210 is held in the closed state on the rear side of the mechanism mounting body 13 by being elastically engaged. Then, the rear cover body 210 covers the entire display device control board box 117 (see FIG. 9) on the rear surface of the game board 5 and a portion extending from the substantially middle portion to the upper end of the main control board box 132 by the rear cover body 210. ing. As a result, the board connector of the main control board 131 exposed at the upper part of the main control board box 132 (mainly a board connector for connecting to the display device control board 116) is hidden from view from behind.

  Further, a portion from the substantially middle portion to the lower end of the main control board box 132 is exposed without being covered by the rear cover body 210. The inspection connector 218 disposed on the main control board 131 is exposed below the main control board box 132, and the inspection connector on the main control board 131 is closed with the rear cover body 210 closed. A board inspection device (not shown) can be connected to the connector 218 for inspection.

  A large number of heat radiation holes 230, 231, 232, and 233 are provided in the rear cover body 210, and internal heat is released from these many heat radiation holes 230, 231, 232, and 233. . In this embodiment, the rear cover body 210 is provided with a large number of slit-like heat radiation holes 230 extending from the peripheral wall portion 213 to the rear wall portion 212, and from the substantially middle height position of the rear wall portion 212 to the upper portion. A large number of elliptical, elliptical, etc. heat radiation holes 231 are penetrated, and a large number of elliptical, elliptical, etc. heat radiation holes 232 and a predetermined number of horizontally elongated rectangular heat radiation holes 233 are penetrated below the rear wall 212. Has been.

  Further, the horizontally elongated rectangular heat radiation holes 233 have a size corresponding to the size and arrangement position of the plurality of parallel seal portions 235 sealed by the seal screws (sealing members) of the main control board box 132. It penetrates the position. As a result, even when the opaque rear cover body 210 is closed, the plurality of parallel sealing portions 235 of the main control board box 132 are exposed so as to be visible at the portion of the heat radiation hole 233. For this reason, even when the rear cover body 210 is closed, the sealing state of the sealing portion 235 of the main control board box 132 can be easily visually confirmed. Further, since the opaque synthetic resin material can be easily used as a synthetic resin material that is recycled compared to the transparent synthetic resin material, the rear cover body 210 can be manufactured at low cost.

  Of the peripheral wall portion 213 of the rear cover body 210, a predetermined position (two places on the left and right in this embodiment) of the upper wall portion 213c is substantially C-shaped to hold a power cord (not shown) in an appropriately folded state. An elastically deformable cord holder 237 extends toward the rear wall surface of the upper tank rail 150 (the rear wall surface of the rail component 139). A knob for removing the power cord by elastically deforming the cord holder 237 is formed at the tip of the cord holder 237.

  One end of the power cord is detachably connected to the board connector 239 of the distribution board 238, and the power plug at the other end is inserted into a power outlet. As described above, by forming the cord holding body 237 integrally with the rear cover body 210 and holding the power cord, the power cord hangs when the pachinko machine 1 is transported and stored, and it becomes an obstacle to foreign matter. The trouble which is caught can be prevented.

[About the configuration of ball derivatives etc. for the lower pan of the rear lower part of the main body frame]
This will be described with reference to FIGS. 2 and 6. 6 is a perspective view showing a state in which the rear cover body and various control boards are removed from the perspective view of the pachinko machine shown in FIG.

  A lower dish ball derivative 253 is attached to the other side portion (the hinge portion) of the rear lower region of the main body frame 3 in the recessed portion of the rear step portion of the speaker box portion 16. The lower tray ball derivative 253 is used when the game balls paid out to the upper plate 51 through the upper plate connecting path (not shown) from the winning and rental ball passages of the ball dispensing device 170 are full. The game ball on the upper plate communication path is for guiding the game ball to the lower plate 31.

  In this embodiment, a board box 254 that houses the interface board 252 is mounted on the outer surface of the rear wall of the lower dish ball derivative 253. The interface board 252 is interposed between the ball rental machine installed adjacent to the pachinko machine 1 and the payout control board 197, and transmits / receives a signal related to ball rental between the ball rental machine and the payout control board 197. Electrical connection is possible.

[About the configuration of the game board]
This will be described with reference to FIGS. FIG. 10 is an enlarged front view showing a configuration of a game board having a game area. FIG. 11 is a perspective view showing the game board obliquely from the front. FIG. 12 is a plan view of the game board. FIG. 13 is a side view of the game board.

  As shown in FIGS. 10 and 11, the game board 5 has a substantially circular game area forming wall 80 that forms the game area 37. Inside the game area forming wall 80 (on the game area 37 side) and on the left side, a guide rail 78 including an outer rail 76 and an inner rail 77 that guide the game ball to the game area 37 is provided. A game ball launched from the launcher unit 194 (see FIG. 7) is driven toward the game area 37 along the guide rail.

  In the center of the game area 37, a center accessory 300 is arranged. The center accessory 300 has a size that occupies more than two-thirds of the width direction of the game area 37. The center accessory 300 has a substantially rectangular opening 301. As will be described later, the floating body drive device 20 and the effect display device 115 are stacked on the rear side of the opening 301. The center accessory 300 has a frame-shaped decorative body 370, and the frame-shaped decorative body 370 is provided along the opening edge of the opening 301.

  A first start port 390 capable of receiving a game ball driven toward the game area 37 is disposed below the center combination 300. Below the first start port 390, a third start port 394 having a pair of movable pieces 396 (the second start port will be described later) is disposed. When the pair of movable pieces 396 are in the closed state, the third start port 394 is unable or impossible to receive the game ball. When the pair of movable pieces 396 is in the open state, It becomes easier to accept a game ball than the one start port 390. In addition, a pair of movable piece 396 shown in FIG. 10 and FIG. 11 shows an open state.

  In the present embodiment, “downward” means the downstream side of the game ball in the downflow direction, and “upward” means the upstream side of the game ball in the downflow direction.

  An opening 372 is formed in the lower frame 370a of the frame-shaped decorative body 370 directly above the first start port 390.

  A jackpot gaming opening / closing device is provided between the first start port 390 and the ball discharge port 406, specifically below the third start port 394 and above the ball discharge port 406 (directly above in the present embodiment). 400 is provided. The jackpot gaming opening / closing device 400 includes a jackpot gaming big prize opening 400a and a jackpot gaming big prize opening opening / closing door 400b provided corresponding to the jackpot gaming big prize opening 400a. The jackpot game grand prize winning port 400a is an opening through which a game ball can be received. The jackpot gaming prize winning opening / closing door 400b is a member for switching the jackpot gaming prize winning opening 400a between an open state in which a game ball can be received and a closed state in which a game ball cannot be received or difficult. is there. It should be noted that when the big hit game winning prize opening 400a is in the closed state, it is not necessarily limited to the fact that it is impossible to accept the game ball that is driven toward the game area 37, and it is difficult, preferably extremely difficult. It may be.

  A passing gate 402 through which a game ball can pass is provided on the left side of the center accessory 300, and the lower left and lower right of the center accessory 300 (the left and right sides of the first start port 390 and the third start port 394). ) Are each provided with a general winning opening 404.

  In the present embodiment, the “left side” means the left side as viewed from the player.

  The game balls that have not won any of the start openings 390, 392, 394, the jackpot gaming opening / closing device 400 and the general winning opening 404 are discharged to the back of the game board 5 on the most downstream side in the flow direction of the game balls. A ball discharge port 406 is formed. In other words, game balls that did not win any of the start ports 390, 392, 394, the jackpot game opening / closing device 400 and the general winning port 404 provided upstream of the ball discharge port 406 in the flow direction of the game ball. Flows down toward the ball discharge port 406.

  The jackpot game opening / closing device 400 is disposed immediately above the ball discharge port 406. As a result, during the opening / closing operation of the jackpot gaming opening / closing device 400, the game balls that have not won any of the start ports 390, 392, 394 and the general winning port 404 gather near the jackpot gaming opening / closing device 400. Therefore, you can have a sense of expectation for winning a prize.

  On the lower right of the center object 300, a first special symbol display 84 for displaying a lottery result by a first special symbol lottery means 700, which will be described later, and a second special symbol for displaying a lottery result by a second special symbol lottery means 710. A display 86, a first special symbol hold indicator 88 that displays the number of lotteries held by the first special symbol lottery means 700, and a second special symbol hold indicator that displays the number of lotteries held by the second special symbol lottery means 710. 90 is provided. Also, a normal symbol display 82 for displaying the lottery result by the normal symbol lottery means 720 and a normal symbol hold indicator 92 for displaying the number of lotteries held by the normal symbol lottery means 720 are provided.

  Each of these indicators 82, 84, 86, 88, 90, 92 is constituted by, for example, an LED, and the lottery result by the first special symbol lottery means 700, the second special symbol lottery means, depending on the lighting state of this LED. The lottery result by 710, the lottery result by the normal symbol lottery means 720, the holding number of lotteries by the first special symbol lottery means 700, the holding number of lotteries by the second special symbol lottery means 710, and the holding number of lotteries by the normal symbol lottery means 720 Is notified.

  In addition, according to the present embodiment, the “number of lottery holds” means the number of holds for determining whether or not the acquired random number for determining whether or not the winning random number for winning is acquired, However, the present invention is not limited to this, and the number of determinations may be the number of determination random numbers for which determination is made and the acquisition determination random numbers are reserved.

  Further, the first special symbol hold indicator 88 and the second special symbol hold indicator 90 may be the number of lots to be held instead of the lottery hold number. In other words, although it is determined whether or not the random number for determination of success / failure is obtained and whether or not the random number for determination of success / failure is acquired, the determination result is not displayed on the first special symbol display 84 or the second special symbol display 86. , The number of such hold may be displayed.

  As shown in FIG. 12 and FIG. 13, the game board 5 of the present embodiment includes a front component member 79 including a guide rail 78, a frame-shaped center accessory 300, and a jackpot, as shown in FIGS. 12 and 13. A game opening / closing device 400, a third start opening 394, a general winning opening 404, a winning opening unit 260, a side decoration member 262 including a passing gate 402 (see FIGS. 10 and 11), and a center role from the front side. A board-like game board base 266 having a plurality of through holes of appropriate sizes for attaching the object 300, the winning a prize opening unit 260, and the side decoration member 262, and a floating body drive device attached to the rear side of the game board base 266 20, an effect display device 115 fixed to the rear side of the floating body driving device 20 so as to be superimposed on the front and rear of the floating body driving device 20, and a bottom of the floating body driving device 20 And an outlet port which is attached to the rear surface side of the game board base 266 and supports the sub-control board box 130 and the main control board box 132 and which is ejected from the game board 5 into the game area 37. A board box holder 268 having a path is mainly provided.

  More specifically, an opening region having a horizontally long rectangular shape in front view is formed at a substantially central portion of the game board base 266 in order to arrange the frame-shaped center accessory 300, and the center fitted in the opening region The floating body driving device 20 is arranged so as to cover the entire opening 301 of the accessory 300 behind. As will be described later, in the floating body driving device 20, at least a portion covering the opening 301 of the center accessory 300 is formed of a transparent member. Therefore, from the front side of the pachinko machine 1, the effect display device 115 disposed behind the center accessory 300 is configured to be visible through the floating body driving device 20. The details of the floating body drive device 20 will be described later.

[About the 1st and 2nd stages in the center role]
This will be described with reference to FIGS. 10 and 11. As shown in FIGS. 10 and 11, the center accessory 300 includes a first shelf (hereinafter referred to as “first stage 330”) and a game ball in the vicinity of the lower frame 370 a of the frame-shaped decorative body 370. It has the 2nd shelf part (henceforth "the 2nd stage 350") arrange | positioned downstream from the 1st stage 330 about the flow-down direction. The position where the second stage 350 is disposed is on the opposite side of the effect display device 115 with respect to the first stage 330 (that is, the front (player) side).

  A stage guiding path (hereinafter referred to as a stage guiding path) for guiding a flowing game ball to the first stage 330 near the substantially vertical center of the left frame 370b of the frame-shaped decorative body 370 (that is, the side of the frame-shaped decorative body 370). , Referred to as “warp 316”).

  The first stage 330 is formed in a substantially flat surface from the warp outlet side end 336 to the warp opposite outlet side end 338. On the other hand, the second stage 350 is formed of a curved surface that is curved so that its substantially central portion is lowered.

  The game balls received at the warp inlet 306 are discharged from the warp outlet 312 and guided to the first stage 330. Note that the direction in which the game ball flows down in the warp 316 and the direction in which the game ball rolls in the first stage 330 are substantially collinear, the game ball that has flowed down the warp 316 has little loss of kinetic energy. That is, if the game ball that has flowed down the warp 316 changes its traveling direction, kinetic energy is lost. Therefore, the game ball that has flowed down the warp 316 rolls on the first stage 330 vigorously. Thereby, the game ball guided to the first stage 330 rolls vigorously on the first stage 330, and the time for staying on each stage 330, 350 becomes longer. As a result, the game in each stage 330, 350 A ball will be played, and interest will be enhanced.

  In the present embodiment, the game ball is not guided to the first stage 330 and the second stage 350 from the right side of the center accessory 300. That is, since the game balls are guided only from the left side of the center accessory 300 to the first stage 330 and the second stage 350, the game balls rolling on the first stage 330 and the second stage 350 are viewed from opposite directions. Rolling is not inhibited by the guided game ball. As a result, the time spent on each stage 330, 350 is lengthened, and as a result, the game ball plays in each stage 330, 350, and the interest is enhanced.

  The first stage 330 is formed with a second starting port 392 capable of receiving a game ball at a substantially central portion thereof. The game ball that has won the second starting port 392 is discharged to the back of the game board 5 through a discharge path (not shown) communicating with the back of the game board 5.

  A frame-shaped decorative body is disposed at a position corresponding to a substantially central portion in the left-right direction of the second stage 350 (that is, a portion corresponding to the second start port 392 of the first stage 330) via the first start port guide path 374. A first start guide port 368 communicating with an opening 372 formed in the lower frame 370a of 370 is formed.

  The game ball guided to the first start guide port 368 passes through the first start port guide path 374 and is discharged from the opening 372 onto the game board 5. Here, since the first start port guide path 374 is formed so as to guide the game ball to a position directly above the first start port 390, the first start port guide path 374 is guided to the first start port guide path 374 and discharged to the game board 5 surface side. The expectation that the played game ball wins the first start opening 390 becomes very large. However, a nail (not shown) is disposed directly above the first start port 390, and this nail may inhibit the winning of the game ball to the first start port 390. Therefore, the probability that the game ball discharged from the opening 372 onto the game board 5 through the first start port guiding path 374 wins the first start port 390 is about one fourth to three fourths. Become.

[Configuration of floating body drive unit]
This will be described with reference to FIGS. FIG. 14 is a rear view of the game board centering on the floating body drive device. FIG. 15 is a rear perspective view of the game board centering on the floating body drive device. FIG. 16 is an enlarged side cross-sectional view centering on the blower fan. 14 and 15, the effect display device 115 and the board box holder 268 are not shown for easy understanding.

  As shown in FIGS. 14 to 16, the floating body drive device 20 includes a transparent case 21 made of a transparent resin (for example, a light-transmitting plastic) in which the effect display device 115 is disposed on the back side. Yes. The transparent case 21 is a box-like body having a longitudinal direction in the left-right direction and a slight thickness in the front-rear direction when viewed from the front, and a floating body Z imitating an unidentified flying object (so-called UFO) is contained therein. It is enclosed.

  Here, the floating body Z is a colored accessory using a lightweight material such as plastic or polystyrene foam, needs to be light enough to float at least by wind force, and has a substantially spherical outer shape. desirable. In the present embodiment, the floating body Z has a hemispherical shape of only the upper half, and a hook portion that protrudes from the lower edge of the floating body over the entire circumference is formed to simulate an unidentified flying object (so-called UFO) as a whole. Appearance. Air can flow into the internal space 100 a formed inside the floating body Z from the lower end opening 100 b of the floating body Z. Moreover, since the upper end hole 100c which is a small-diameter through hole communicating with the internal space 100a is formed at the apex portion of the floating body Z, the air flowing into the internal space 100a can flow out from the upper end hole 100c. ing. The floating principle of the floating body Z will be described later.

  Further, the upper surface of the transparent case 21 is constituted by a mesh upper plate 21a which is a plate-like member having a large number of small rectangular holes opened in a mesh shape. Similarly, the lower surface of the transparent case 21 is configured by a mesh lower plate 21b that is a plate-like member having a large number of small rectangular holes opened in a mesh shape. Therefore, the inside of the transparent case 21 communicates with the outside via the mesh upper plate 21a and the mesh lower plate 21b so that air can flow.

  The transparent case 21 is fixed so as to be in close contact with the back surface of the center accessory 300 and cover the entire central opening (opening 301) of the center accessory 300. Further, the effect display device 115 is disposed behind the transparent case 21 so as to substantially coincide with the opening 301 of the center accessory 300 in a front view. Therefore, the player can visually recognize the floating body Z floating inside the transparent case 21 together with various effect images displayed on the effect display device 115 in the opening 301 of the center accessory 300. The internal region of the transparent case 21 to which the floating body Z can move is the floating body movement region 200.

  Here, the size of the transparent case 21 in the left-right direction is substantially equal to the size of the opening 301 formed in the center accessory 300 in the left-right direction, while the size of the transparent case 21 in the vertical direction is equal to the opening. It is formed slightly larger than the vertical size of 301. When viewed from the front, both side surfaces of the transparent case 21 and the both side edge portions of the opening 301 substantially coincide with each other, and the upper surface (mesh upper plate 21 a) of the transparent case 21 and the upper edge portion of the opening 301 are substantially the same. Match. On the other hand, the lower surface (mesh lower plate 21 b) of the transparent case 21 is positioned below the lower edge of the opening 301 in a front view.

  With such a configuration, the floating body moving region 200 is a floating body display region 200a that is visible from the opening 301 of the center accessory 300 and a floating body that is hidden by the center accessory 300 and cannot be seen in front view. It is comprised with the concealment area | region 200b. When the floating body Z is located in the floating body display area 200a, the player can visually recognize the floating body Z, while the floating body Z is below the floating body display area 200a (that is, the floating body). When the player is positioned in the concealment area 200b), the player cannot see the floating body Z.

  Note that a distance sensor 26 and a reflecting plate 27 are provided inside the transparent case 21 so as to face the lower end edges of the left side wall and the right side wall in rear view (see FIGS. 14 and 15). In this embodiment, the distance sensor 26 is an infrared distance sensor that calculates the distance based on the phase difference between the light projection signal emitted toward the reflection plate 27 and the received reflection signal and outputs data. In addition, since the distance sensor 26 and the reflecting plate 27 are disposed within the range of the floating body concealing region 200b, the player cannot visually recognize the distance sensor 26 and the reflecting plate 27.

  When the floating body Z is present in the floating body display area 200a, the light projection signal emitted from the distance sensor 26 is reflected by the reflecting plate 27, and the distance sensor 26 receives the reflected signal. Then, the distance data output from the distance sensor 26 indicates the size from the distance sensor 26 to the reflection plate 27. Thereby, it is possible to specify that the floating body Z does not exist in the floating body concealing area 200b (that is, located in the floating body display area 200a).

  On the other hand, when the floating body Z exists in the floating body concealment region 200b, the light projection signal emitted from the distance sensor 26 is reflected by the floating body Z, and the reflected signal is received by the distance sensor 26. Then, the distance data output from the distance sensor 26 indicates the size from the distance sensor 26 to the floating body Z. Thereby, it can be specified that the floating body Z exists in the floating body concealment region 200b, and the distance from the distance sensor 26 to the floating body Z (that is, the current position of the floating body Z) is specified. be able to.

  By the way, in the floating body drive device 20, the air guide portion 22 extends downward from the transparent case 21, and the fan operation portion 28 is disposed behind the air guide portion 22. The air guide portion 22 extends in the left-right direction of the transparent case 21 so as to bend downward and rearward from the front edge of the transparent case 21, and further extends downward and rearward from the wall portion 22a. The wall portion 22d forming the flat plate portion and the both side walls 22b, 22c extending downward from the left and right end edges of the transparent case 21 are mainly configured to surround the entire mesh lower plate 21b of the transparent case 21. A substantially cylindrical body is formed. And this air guide part 22 is opened only to the upper part where the mesh lower plate 21b is arranged and the rear part where the fan operation part 28 is arranged. The air guide unit 22 having such a configuration has a function of guiding the wind force supplied from the fan operation unit 28 to the inside of the transparent case 21 via the mesh lower plate 21b.

  Furthermore, a plurality of partition plates 221 for partitioning the inside of the air guide portion 22 in the front-rear direction to form a plurality of air passages (hereinafter referred to as air blow blocks) 220 are provided in the air guide portion 22 in the left-right direction. Are arranged in parallel at equal intervals. In the present embodiment, seven partition plates 221 are provided inside the air guide portion 22, and eight independent air blowing blocks 220 are formed in parallel. In each blower block 220, when wind force is supplied to the blower holes 222 that open toward the rear of the blower block 220, the wind force is applied to the mesh lower plate 21b along the inner surfaces (guide walls 223) of the wall portions 22a and 22d. Move towards

  Each blower block 220 forms a blower path that is independent from the adjacent blower block 220, and a blower fan 284 blows air in close contact with the blower hole 222 as described later. Therefore, the wind force supplied toward the blow hole 222 is efficiently guided to the inside of the transparent case 21 with little leakage. Further, since the guide wall 223 extends toward the front upper side, the wind force supplied to the blower block 220 can be smoothly guided into the transparent case 21.

  The fan operating unit 28 has a main body 281 having a length in the left-right direction substantially the same as the air guide unit 22, and two guide rails 282 are provided in the left-right direction of the main body 281. Yes. A blower fan 284 is disposed in close proximity to the air guide portion 22 (specifically, the blower hole 222 included in each blower block 220). The blower fan 284 is mounted on the carriage 285. The blower fan 284 is a blower that takes in outside air by the rotation of a spring body 284b provided inside the fan main body 284a and blows it in one direction forward or backward. Here, the front side of the blower fan 284 is disposed so as to face and face the air guide portion 22, and a part thereof is fitted into the blower hole 222 (see FIG. 16). Therefore, the wind force directed to the front side of the blower fan 284 is reliably supplied to the inside of the air guide unit 22 without leakage.

  A rotating body 286 and a driven pulley 287 are provided on the left and right side edges of the main body 281, and a gear belt 283 is suspended from the rotating body 286 and the driven pulley 287. Further, the floating body drive device 20 includes a carriage motor 24 (see FIG. 22) that is a stepping motor. The rotating body 286 rotates in accordance with the forward or reverse rotation of the carriage motor 24, and the carriage 285 connected to the gear belt 283 is driven in the left-right direction along the two guide rails 282. Yes.

  And the floating body drive device 20 is provided with the fan motor 25 (refer FIG. 22). The fan motor 25 drives the air blowing operation of the air blowing fan 284 and can control the air blowing direction and air blowing speed (wind pressure) of the air blowing fan 284 according to the rotation direction and rotation speed of the fan motor 25. In the present embodiment, when the fan motor 25 rotates in the forward direction, the blower fan 284 blows air toward the front (that is, in the direction facing the air guide unit 22), while when the fan motor 25 rotates in the reverse direction, the blower fan 284 moves backward. (I.e., the direction facing the air guide 22 is opposite).

  A Peltier module 29 is disposed on the lower surface of the wall portion 22d forming the air guide portion 22 so as to be in surface contact with the wall portion 22d. The Peltier module 29 is formed in an elongated plate shape so as to cover the lower surface of the wall portion 22 d across the left and right direction of the air guide portion 22. And this Peltier module 29 heats the outside air taken in the inside of the air guide part 22 (in other words, each ventilation block 220) by heating or cooling the upper surface (front surface) side that contacts the wall part 22d. Or for cooling.

  Specifically, the Peltier module 29 is configured as a unit by connecting a plurality of Peltier elements electrically in series with each other so that the heat transfer directions coincide with each other. These Peltier elements are made of a plate-like semiconductor, and each surface can be heated or cooled by passing a current over the front and back surfaces. The surface to be heated and the cooling by changing the direction of the current. The surface to be reversed is reversed. In this way, each surface is heated or cooled by passing an electric current over the front and back surfaces, and the action of reversing the surface to be heated and the surface to be cooled by changing the direction of the current is changed to Peltier. It is called an effect.

  As a result, by passing a current in one direction through the Peltier module 29 (that is, heating the surface side of the Peltier module 29), the inside of the air guide portion 22 is heated and the warm air is supplied into the transparent case 21. Can be sent. On the other hand, by passing a current in the reverse direction through the Peltier module 29 (that is, cooling the surface side of the Peltier module 29), the inside of the air guide portion 22 can be cooled and cool air can be blown. Moreover, the temperature of hot air or cold air can be adjusted by making the heat absorption or heat generation of the Peltier module 29 variable according to the current. In the vicinity of the Peltier module 29, a temperature sensor 249 (see FIG. 22), which is a temperature measuring element that detects the temperature of air blown by the blower fan 284, is provided.

  Further, on the lower surface (back surface) side of the Peltier module 29, a heat sink 23, which is a metal part shaped so as to have a large surface area so as to easily diffuse the heat generated by the Peltier module 29, is provided. Therefore, when the front side of the Peltier module 29 is cooled, the back side is heated, and the heat generated on the back side is discharged to the outside of the floating body driving device 20 via the heat sink 23. Accordingly, heat generated on the back surface side of the Peltier module 29 is not increased, and it is suppressed that the temperature of the air blown through the air guide portion 22 is affected.

  With the configuration as described above, in the floating body driving device 20, wind force (hot air or cold air) supplied from the fan operation unit 28 is guided to the inside of the transparent case 21 via the air guide unit 22. And the floating body Z floats the inside of the transparent case 21 (floating body movement area | region 200) with the wind force guided inside the transparent case 21, and can move freely. Since the mesh upper plate 21a is also formed with a mesh-like small hole, the wind force guided inside the transparent case 21 does not stay and is discharged outside the transparent case 21 via the mesh upper plate 21a. The

[Operation principle of floating body]
This will be described with reference to FIGS. 17 to 20 are enlarged views of the rear surface of the floating body driving device for explaining the operating principle of the floating body. In FIG. 17 to FIG. 20, the thin arrows exemplify the direction of the wind force supplied from the fan operation unit 28, and the thick arrows exemplify the moving direction of the carriage 285 or the floating body Z.

  First, as shown in FIG. 17, when the floating operation of the floating body Z is started, the current state of the floating body Z specified by the distance sensor 26 among the plurality of air blowing blocks 220 formed in the air guide unit 22 is illustrated. The fan operation unit 28 moves the carriage 285 toward the blower block 220 corresponding to the position. Then, the blower fan 284 mounted on the carriage 285 is brought close to and opposed to the blower hole 222 of the blower block 220. As a result, when the blower fan 284 performs a blowing operation toward the blower hole 222, the wind blower 220 is guided to the blower block 220 and the wind force is supplied from directly below the floating body Z toward the inside of the transparent case 21. .

  Next, as shown in FIG. 18, the blowing fan 284 performs a blowing operation toward the blowing hole 222. At this time, the blower fan 284 supplies wind force of a degree that the floating body Z slightly rises toward the blow hole 222. Thereby, the floating body Z floats slightly in the range of the floating body concealment region 200b by the wind force blown from directly below via the air blowing block 220. Therefore, the player cannot visually recognize the floating body Z at this stage, and cannot grasp the current position of the floating body Z.

  Further, the blower fan 284 continues to apply a uniform wind force from below to the floating body Z so as to continuously apply an even lift to the floating body Z. Thereby, the floating body Z is maintained in a floating state while maintaining its posture. The floating body Z preferably has a substantially spherical shape so that wind force is evenly applied from below, and is at least symmetrical with respect to the center line in the vertical direction. It takes a thing.

  Here, in the present embodiment, the wind force blown from below the floating body Z is supplied to the internal space 100a through the lower end opening 100b of the floating body Z. Here, an upper end hole 100c penetrating in the vertical direction) is formed. Since the upper end hole 100c has a smaller diameter than the lower end opening 100b, only a part of the wind force supplied to the internal space 100a is discharged from the upper end hole 100c, while the remaining wind force supplied to the internal space 100a is internal. A lift force that raises the floating body Z is generated in the space 100a.

  Furthermore, the wind force discharged from the upper end hole 100c passes upward through the cross-sectional center of the floating body Z. Thereby, even during the floating operation of the floating body Z, the floating body Z stands upright vertically (ie, the axis of the floating body Z is caused by the wind force passing through the center of the cross section of the floating body Z from below to above). The vertical posture is maintained. That is, even if the floating body Z is floated in the left-right direction, the posture of the floating body Z does not change, so that the moving position of the floating body Z can be freely controlled.

  The fan operation unit 28 moves the carriage 285 to the blower block 220 corresponding to the display start position of the floating body Z while maintaining the state where the blower fan 284 floats the floating body Z with wind power. Here, even during the movement of the carriage 285, wind force that causes the floating body Z to slightly rise by the blower fan 284 is continuously supplied via the blower blocks 220. Since the floating body Z is subject to inertia to maintain a stable floating state by the wind force blown from below, the floating body Z also follows the carriage 285 and horizontally in the horizontal direction within the floating body concealment area 200b. Moving.

  Then, as shown in FIG. 19, when the carriage 285 is moved to the blower block 220 corresponding to the display start position of the floating body Z, the blower fan 284 is in a state of being opposed to the blower hole 222 of the blower block 220. The blowing fan 284 performs a blowing operation at a higher blowing speed (wind pressure). Then, a larger wind force is applied to the floating body Z placed in the floating state in the floating body concealment region 200b from below through the air blowing block 220. Therefore, the floating body Z moves up to a height position corresponding to the wind force in the floating body display area 200a by the wind force. Note that the blower fan 284 imparts an even lift to the floating body Z regardless of the size of the wind force, so that the posture is kept constant even when the floating body Z is raised or lowered.

  Thereby, on the front side of the pachinko machine 1, the floating body Z is displayed so as to rise from below inside the opening 301 in the center accessory 300 (that is, the floating body display area 200a). Then, the player can visually recognize the floating body Z of the floating body driving device 20 and various effect images of the effect display device 115 disposed behind the floating body Z as an integrated effect in which both are superimposed.

  As shown in FIG. 20, in the transparent case 21 (floating body movement region 200), the floating body Z is moved by an arbitrary distance in an arbitrary direction of 360 degrees in front view or rear view. Can do. That is, in the floating body moving region 200, the floating body Z can be moved to a desired position through a free path. Such movement of the floating body Z includes the lifting and lowering operation (up and down movement) of the floating body Z according to the magnitude of the wind force supplied from the blower fan 284 and the horizontal operation (left and right movement) of the floating body Z accompanying the movement of the carriage 285. (Moving) can be realized by appropriately combining them. For example, when the floating body Z is moved a predetermined distance in the lower right direction in the rear view (see FIG. 20), the carriage 285 is moved in the right direction and the wind force supplied from the blower fan 284 is gradually reduced. .

  By the way, in this embodiment, the temperature of the air blown by the blower fan 284 can be arbitrarily adjusted by driving the Peltier module 29. Therefore, when the floating body Z is floated, the upper surface (front surface) side of the Peltier module 29 is cooled so that the blower fan 284 supplies cool air toward the inside of the transparent case 21. Thereby, even if the floating body Z is formed of a material having poor heat resistance such as foamed polystyrene, the floating body Z is not deformed or distorted by the blowing temperature from the blowing fan 284, and the floating body Z is accurately floating. Can be maintained.

  When the floating body Z is not floated, the upper surface (front surface) of the Peltier module 29 is cooled and the fan motor 25 is rotated in the reverse direction so that the blower fan 284 sucks air from the inside of the transparent case 21. Like that. That is, the blower fan 284 supplies cold air from the inside of the transparent case 21 toward the rear of the fan operation unit 28 (the back side of the game board 5). Then, the floating body Z existing inside the transparent case 21 is held in a state of being in contact with the mesh lower plate 21b by the downward wind force.

  Thereby, even if shaking or vibration occurs in the pachinko machine 1, it is possible to prevent the floating body Z from inadvertently jumping out from the floating body concealing area 200b to the floating body display area 200a and being visible. Furthermore, the back side of the game board 5 is provided with a large number of electronic components such as the liquid crystal display device 115 and various substrates, and is closed by the game board mounting frame 12 and the rear cover body 210, and heat generated by these electronic components is generated. It was easily trapped inside, causing malfunctions and malfunctions. However, the various electronic components provided on the back side of the game board 5 can be cooled by the cold air supplied rearward from the fan operation unit 28, and the malfunction or failure of the pachinko machine 1 can be prevented.

  In the case where the wind force discharged from the inside of the transparent case 21 to the outside through the mesh upper plate 21a is guided toward the front side of the pachinko machine 1, the blowing temperature by the blowing fan 284 is set. The player can experience it. Therefore, as another example of use of the floating body drive device 20, for example, when the floating body Z is used, the blower fan 284 supplies hot air by heating the upper surface (front surface) of the Peltier module 29. Thus, the player may strongly feel that the so-called “hot production” is being performed by the warm air.

[Control structure of main board and peripheral board]
This will be described with reference to FIGS. FIG. 21 is a block diagram schematically showing the control configuration, and mainly showing the configuration around the main board. FIG. 22 is a block diagram schematically showing the control configuration, and mainly showing the configuration around the peripheral substrate. In these drawings, bold arrows indicate connection and direction of the power source, and thin arrows indicate connection and direction of the signal.

  Control of the pachinko machine 1 of this embodiment is broadly divided into a group of main boards 600 (shown in FIG. 21) and a group of peripheral boards 660 (shown in FIG. 22). The group of main boards 600 controls gaming operations (winning detection, winning judgment, special symbol display, prize ball payout, etc.), and the group of peripheral boards 660 has stage operations (issue decoration, sound output, liquid crystal display and decoration body). Control).

  As shown in FIG. 21, the main board 600 includes a main control board 131 and a payout control board 197. The main control board 131 includes a CPU 602 as a central processing unit, a ROM 604 as a read-only memory, and a RAM 606 as a readable / writable memory.

  The CPU 602 controls various games performed in the pachinko machine 1 by executing a control program stored in the ROM 604, and creates a command signal to be output to the peripheral board 660 and the payout control board 197.

  The ROM 604 temporarily stores various data generated in various processes executed by the main control board 131 and information such as input signals.

  The main board 600 is connected to the power supply board 195 via the power supply relay terminal plate 199, and operating power is supplied from the power supply board 195.

  The input interface of the main control board 131 includes a first start port sensor 644 that detects a winning state for the first start port 390, a second start port sensor 646 that detects a winning state for the second start port 392, A third start port sensor 648 for detecting a winning state at the 3 start port 394 and an all winning port winning number detection sensor 650 for counting the number of winnings for all the winning ports are connected.

  In addition, the input interface of the main control board 131 indicates that the game ball has won the gate sensor 630 for detecting that the game ball has passed through the passing gate 402 and the general winning opening 404 through the panel relay terminal plate 624. A general winning opening sensor 632 to be detected is connected.

  Further, a jackpot game switchgear count sensor 640 is connected to the input interface of the main control board 131 via a jackpot game switchgear relay terminal board 628 connected to the panel relay terminal board 624.

  Detection signals from the above sensors are input to the main control board 131. Also connected to the input interface of the main control board 131 are an inner frame opening switch 620 for detecting the opening state of the front frame body 11 and a door opening switch 622 for detecting the opening state of the front frame 4.

  On the other hand, a normal symbol / special symbol display board 636 is connected to the output interface of the panel relay terminal board 624 via a symbol limiting resistor board 634, and the normal symbol display 82, the first symbol is displayed from the main control board 131. A drive signal can be output to the special symbol display 84 and the second special symbol display 86.

  Further, the jackpot game opening / closing device relay terminal plate 628 has an output interface with a normal electric combination solenoid 638 for driving the pair of movable pieces 396 of the third start port 394 and the jackpot gaming opening / closing device 400. A big hit game opening / closing device opening / closing solenoid 642 for driving the mouth opening / closing door 400b is connected, and these drive signals are outputted from the main control board 131.

  On the other hand, the payout control board 197 includes a CPU 608 as a central processing unit, a ROM 610 as a read-only memory, and a RAM 612 as a readable / writable memory.

  The payout control board 197 processes the command signal input from the main control board 131 and outputs a drive signal to the ball payout device 170 and the launch motor 192 connected to the launch control board 616. Thereby, the ball payout device 170 pays out the game ball according to the drive signal, and the firing motor 192 can fire the game ball according to the drive signal.

  Note that bi-directional communication is performed between the main control board 131 and the payout control board 197 via respective input / output interfaces. For example, when the main control board 131 transmits a prize ball command, it responds to this. An ACK signal is returned from the payout control board 197 to the main control board 131.

  The payout control board 197 is also connected with a lower tray full tank switch 614 that detects that the game balls stored in the lower tray 31 are full. “Please remove from the dish 31” is notified.

  Further, an external terminal plate 618 is connected to the main control board 131 and the payout control board 197, and the winning state to each start port 390, 392, 394 and each opening / closing device 400, the fluctuation state of the normal symbol / special symbol, and so on. In addition, various information such as a gaming state based on the lottery result is output to a hall computer or the like provided in the gaming facility.

  On the other hand, the peripheral substrate 660 includes a peripheral control substrate 662 and a display device control substrate 116 as shown in FIG. Note that communication is performed in only one direction between the input / output interface and the input interface between the main control board 131 and the peripheral control board 662, and the main control board 131 and the peripheral control board 662. The command is sent to, but the reverse is not done. The power for operation is also supplied from the power supply board 195 to the peripheral board 660 via the power supply relay terminal plate 199.

  The peripheral control board 662 also has electronic components such as a CPU 664, a ROM 666, and a RAM 668, and a predetermined effect control program can be executed by these electronic components.

  In addition, the peripheral control board 662 is provided with a ROM 672 that stores a sound source that is the basis of sound and music, and a sound source IC 670 that outputs sound and music according to the production content based on the sound source stored in the ROM 672. It has been.

  Note that bidirectional communication is performed between the peripheral control board 662 and the display device control board 116 with each input / output interface.

  On the other hand, a liquid crystal display (LCD) as an effect display device 115 is connected to the display device control board 116, and the display device control board 116 processes a command signal transmitted from the peripheral control board 662, A drive signal is output to the effect display device 115. More specifically, the display device control board 116 includes a CPU 678, a RAM 680, a ROM 682, a VDP 684, and an image ROM 686.

  The CPU 678 receives the command signal sent from the peripheral control board 662 via the input / output interface and performs arithmetic processing based on the command to control the VDP 684. The RAM 680 provides a work area for the CPU 678 and temporarily stores information included in the display command. The ROM 682 holds a program for the CPU 678 (for display control).

  A VDP (video display processor) 684 is a drawing circuit that directly operates an LCD driver (liquid crystal driving circuit) incorporated in the effect display device 115. A register is provided in the VDP 684, and it is possible to hold the operation mode of the VDP 684, setting information of various display functions, and the like. Then, the CPU 678 rewrites various information held in the register, whereby the display mode in the effect display device 115 can be changed variously. The image ROM 686 is a nonvolatile memory that stores various image data, and stores bitmap image data of various display patterns, JPEG image data for a background image, and the like.

  Further, a lamp driving board 688 and a frame decoration relay terminal board 674 are connected to the peripheral control board 662. Further, a center decoration driving unit relay terminal plate 694 is connected to the lamp driving substrate 688 as a relay terminal plate. Further, a floating body driving substrate 500 for controlling the operation of the floating body driving device 20 is connected to the center decoration driving portion relay terminal plate 694.

  The output interface of the floating body driving substrate 500 includes a carriage motor 24 that drives the carriage 285, a Peltier module 29 that adjusts the temperature of air blown by the blower fan 284, a fan motor 25 that rotates the fly body 284b of the blower fan 284, and A fan motor sensor 251 for detecting the rotational speed of the body 284b is connected. On the other hand, on the input interface of the floating body driving substrate 500, the air temperature by the distance sensor 26, which is an infrared sensor that specifies the current position of the floating body Z, the carriage motor sensor 250 that specifies the current position of the carriage 285, and the blower fan 284 is provided. A temperature sensor 249 for detection and a fan motor sensor 251 for detecting the rotation speed of the spring body 284b are connected.

  A panel decoration lamp 690 and a center decoration lamp 304 are connected to the output interface of the lamp driving board 688. Thereby, the lamp drive substrate 688 can switch the lighting state of each of these lamps.

  The frame decoration relay terminal board 674 connected to the peripheral control board 662 is connected to the speakers 18 and 57 connected to the front frame 4, the effect selection switch 60, the frame decoration lamp 676, and the like. In 662, the effect mode output to the effect display device 115 is switched based on the operation state of the effect selection switch 60, and a drive signal is output to the speakers 18, 57 and the frame decoration lamp 676.

[Functional configuration of main control board and peripheral control board]
This will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 23 is a functional block diagram schematically showing a functional configuration of the peripheral control board in the main control board and the peripheral board.

  As shown in FIG. 23, the main control board 131 includes a first special symbol lottery means 700, a first special symbol display control means 802, a first special symbol hold display control means 730, and a first special symbol hold counter 703. Second special symbol lottery means 710, second special symbol display control means 804, second special symbol hold display control means 732, second special symbol hold counter 713, hold order storage means 790, normal symbol Lottery means 720, jackpot game execution means 748, small hit game execution means 746, opening / closing operation control means 744, probability variation game execution means 740, normal symbol display control means 806, normal symbol hold display control means 734 The normal symbol holding counter 723, the short time game execution means 742, the third start port opening / closing control means 728, and the command transmission means 749 are provided.

  The first special symbol lottery means 700 extracts a random number by the first special symbol determination random number extracting means 702 when a game ball wins the first starting opening 390 and is detected by the first starting opening sensor 644. The extracted random numbers are held up to a first predetermined number (for example, 4) by the holding order storage unit 790. When the hold by the hold order storage unit 790 is released, the first special symbol success / failure determination unit 704 determines whether or not the long win, short win or small win is won. The determination by the first special symbol success / failure determination means 704 is the normal symbol normal time determination table stored in the ROM 604 and the random value acquired by the first special symbol determination random number extraction means 702 in the normal gaming state. 706, and in the probability variation gaming state, based on the random number value obtained by the first special symbol per-determination random number extracting means 702 and the special symbol probability variation per-time determination table 708 stored in the ROM 604. Done.

  In the present embodiment, “long win” is a game in which the opening / closing operation of the jackpot game opening / closing device 400 is executed by the jackpot game execution means 748 for 15 rounds, and “short hit” is a jackpot game execution means. 748 is a game in which the opening / closing operation of the jackpot gaming opening / closing device 400 is executed for two rounds. The “small hit” is a game in which the opening / closing operation of the big hit game opening / closing device 400 is executed twice by the small hit game execution means 746. Note that the operation mode of the jackpot game opening / closing device 400 is the same for the short win and the small win, but when the short win is won, the probability changing function is operated by the probability changing game executing means 740 (that is, the probability changing). However, when the winning state is won, the probability variation function is not activated.

  By the way, when winning the long game, the open / close operation of the jackpot game opening / closing device 400 is continuously executed for 15 rounds, whereby a long game where a large amount of game balls can be expected to be paid out is performed. In addition, when winning a short win, a short win game is performed in which the opening and closing operation of the jackpot gaming opening and closing device 400 is continuously executed for two rounds. After the short hit game ends, a probability change game state by the probability change game execution means 740 occurs.

  The second special symbol lottery means 710 receives the second special symbol when the game ball wins the second starting port 392 or the third starting port 394 and is detected by the second starting port sensor 646 or the third starting port sensor 648. A random number is extracted by the hit determination random number extraction means 712. The extracted random number is held by the second special symbol holding counter 713 up to a second predetermined number (for example, four). Then, when the hold by the second special symbol hold counter 713 is released, it is determined by the second special symbol success / failure determination means 714 whether or not the long win, short win or small win is won. The determination by the second special symbol success / failure determination means 714 is a normal symbol normal time determination table stored in the ROM 604 and the random number value acquired by the second special symbol determination random number extraction means 712 in the normal gaming state. 706, and in the probability variation gaming state, based on the random number value obtained by the second special symbol per-determination random number extracting means 712 and the special symbol probability variation per-time determination table 708 stored in the ROM 604. Done.

  The order in which the game balls are detected by the first start port sensor 644, the second start port sensor 646, and the third start port sensor 648 is stored in the special symbol random number storage area 6061, which will be described later, by the holding order storage means 790. Then, the first special symbol lottery means 700 and the second special symbol lottery means 710 perform lottery one by one based on the order stored in the special symbol random number storage area 6061. In other words, based on the order stored in the special symbol random number storage area 6061, the first special symbol success / failure determination means 704 or the second special symbol success / failure determination means 714 determines that the long winning, short winning or small winning is won. It is determined one by one. In addition, the lottery by the first special symbol lottery means 700 and the second special symbol lottery means 710 is the first special symbol hold counter 703 or the second special symbol when a predetermined release condition is established, for example, a variation condition is established. This is done by releasing the hold by the hold counter 713.

  The determination result by the first special symbol determination unit 704 is displayed on the first special symbol display 84 by the first special symbol display control unit 802. The number of holds by the first special symbol hold counter 703 is displayed on the first special symbol hold indicator 88 by the first special symbol hold display control means 730.

  The determination result by the second special symbol determination unit 714 is displayed on the second special symbol display 86 by the second special symbol display control unit 804. Further, the number of holds by the second special symbol hold counter 713 is displayed on the second special symbol hold display 90 by the second special symbol hold display control means 732.

  The jackpot game execution means 748 and the jackpot game execution means 746 execute the jackpot game or the jackpot game based on the determination result by the first special symbol success / failure determination means 704 or the second special symbol success / failure determination means 714. Specifically, when it is determined that the long win is won, the long hit game is executed by the jackpot game executing means 748, and when it is determined that the short win is won, the short hit game is executed by the big hit game executing means 748. If it is determined that the small hit is won, the small hit game executing means 746 executes the small hit game. In the present embodiment, “long win and short win” are collectively referred to as “big hit”, and “long win and short win games” are collectively referred to as “big hit games”.

  In the present embodiment, the long hit game is a game in which the opening / closing operation of the jackpot game opening / closing device 400 is performed over a total of 15 rounds. The short hit game (or small hit game) is a game in which the opening / closing operation of the big hit game opening / closing device 400 is performed two rounds (or twice). The opening / closing operation of the jackpot gaming opening / closing device 400 is performed by operating the jackpot gaming opening / closing device opening / closing solenoid 642 by the opening / closing operation control means 744.

  Specifically, if the lottery result determined by the first special symbol success / failure determination means 704 or the second special symbol success / failure determination means 714 is a long win, the opening / closing operation control means 744 sets the jackpot game opening / closing device opening / closing solenoid 642. The operation is performed to open and close the big winning game opening / closing door 400b for 15 rounds. On the other hand, if the lottery result determined by the first special symbol success / failure determination means 704 and the second special symbol success / failure determination means 714 is short hit, the opening / closing operation control means 744 operates the jackpot game opening / closing device opening / closing solenoid 642. The operation of opening and closing the jackpot opening / closing door 400b is performed only for two rounds.

  When a game ball wins the jackpot gaming opening / closing device 400, the number of winning balls is counted by the jackpot gaming opening / closing device count sensor 640. In addition, in response to the detection of a winning ball by the jackpot gaming opening / closing device count sensor 640, the ball paying device 170 pays out a gaming ball as a winning ball.

  If the lottery result determined by the first special symbol success / failure determination means 704 or the second special symbol success / failure determination means 714 is a small winning game, the opening / closing operation control means 744 opens / closes the big hit game opening / closing device. The solenoid 642 is operated to open and close the jackpot gaming big prize opening / closing door 400b only twice.

  In the present embodiment, the jackpot game opening / closing device 400 is determined depending on whether the lottery result determined by the first special symbol success / failure determination means 704 and the second special symbol success / failure determination means 714 is short win or small win. The opening / closing operation mode is the same. However, in the normal gaming state (that is, any one of the jackpot gaming state, the probability variation gaming state, and the short-time gaming state), if the short winning game is won, the gaming state after the short winning game is over is a big hit However, in the case of winning a small hit, the gaming state after the small winning game is finished does not change (that is, the normal gaming state remains). Therefore, when the opening / closing operation of the big winning game opening / closing door 400b is performed two rounds or twice, it is difficult for the player to determine whether it is short hit or small hit, The probability of winning the jackpot varies depending on the first special symbol lottery means 700 and the second special symbol lottery means 710. Thereby, the player cannot discriminate whether the gaming state is the probability variation gaming state or the normal gaming state, and the interest is enhanced.

  Here, “round” means that a predetermined time (for example, 30 seconds) elapses and a predetermined number (for example, 9 balls) of game balls wins when a long winning game and a short winning game are executed. It means a unit for opening / closing the jackpot gaming opening / closing device 400 by satisfying any of the conditions. Therefore, the opening / closing operation of the jackpot game opening / closing device 400 when the small hit game is being executed is not referred to as “round”. In this embodiment, the opening time of the jackpot gaming opening / closing device 400 per round in the short win game is extremely shorter than the opening time of the jackpot gaming opening / closing device 400 per round in the long winning game. Yes. Note that the opening time of the jackpot gaming opening / closing device 400 per game in the small hit game is substantially the same as the opening time of the jackpot gaming switching device 400 per round in the short hit game.

  The probability variation game execution means 740 increases the probability of winning a jackpot in the lottery by the first special symbol lottery means 700 and the second special symbol lottery means 710 in the game after the long hit game or short hit game is executed. Execute. Specifically, the determination of success / failure by the first special symbol validity determination unit 704 and the second special symbol validity determination unit 714 is performed based on the special symbol probability change time determination table 708, respectively.

  In the present embodiment, “probability change game” means that the first special symbol success / failure determination means 704 and the second special symbol success / failure determination means 714 determine whether or not the special symbol probability change time determination table 708 and special symbol probability change time, respectively. It means a game played based on the hit determination table 708. A gaming state in which a probability variation game is being performed is referred to as a “probability variation gaming state”. Here, the special symbol probability change per hour determination table 708 is set to have a higher probability of winning per long and short than the special symbol normal per hour determination table 706.

  In the present embodiment, when it is determined that the long winning game is executed by the first special symbol determination unit 704 or the second special symbol determination unit 714, for example, after the long winning game is executed, for example, one half. If the first special symbol success / failure determination means 704 or the second special symbol success / failure determination means 714 determines that the short win game is executed, the probability change will occur with a probability of 100%. It becomes a gaming state. On the other hand, when it is determined that a small hit is made by the first special symbol success / failure determining means 704 or the second special symbol appropriate / bad determination means 714, the game state is changed after the small hit game executing means 746 is executed. There is nothing.

  When the game ball passes through the passing gate 402 and is detected by the gate sensor 630, the normal symbol lottery means 720 extracts random numbers by the normal symbol per-determination random number extracting means 722. The extracted random numbers are held up to a predetermined upper limit value (for example, 4) by the normal symbol hold counter 723. When the normal symbol hold counter 723 releases the hold, the normal symbol hit / fail judgment means 724 determines whether or not the hold is made. The determination by the normal symbol success / failure determination means 724 is based on the random number value acquired by the random number extraction means for normal symbol determination 722 and the normal symbol normal time determination table 726 stored in the ROM 604 in the normal gaming state. If it is in the short-time gaming state, it is performed based on the random number value obtained by the random number extraction means 722 for determining the normal symbol per symbol and the table 727 for determining the normal symbol per short time stored in the ROM 604.

  The normal symbol display control means 806 displays the determination result by the normal symbol appropriateness determination unit 724 on the normal symbol display unit 82. Further, the number of holds by the normal symbol hold counter 723 is displayed on the normal symbol hold display 92 by the normal symbol hold display control means 734.

  The short time game executing means 742 executes the short time game for shortening the lottery time in the lottery by the normal symbol lottery means 720. In the probability variation game state, a time-short game by the time-short game execution unit 742 may be performed together with the probability variation game by the probability variation game execution unit 740.

  In the present embodiment, the “short-time gaming state” means a gaming state in which the normal symbol winning / non-winning determination unit 724 determines whether or not the normal symbol is appropriate based on the normal symbol short-time / hit determination table 727. Here, the normal symbol time per hour determination table 727 is set so that the lottery time is shorter than the normal symbol normal time per hour determination table 726. It should be noted that the normal symbol normal hour determination table 726 and the normal symbol short time determination table 727 both have a winning probability set as high as 90%, for example. Therefore, when the normal symbol determination unit 724 determines whether the normal symbol is appropriate or not based on the normal symbol short-time hit determination table 727, the pair of movable pieces 396 are frequently opened and closed, and the third start port 394 is opened. It becomes easier to win game balls. When a game ball wins at the third start port 394, the game ball is paid out by the ball payout device 170, so that it is possible to play the game without reducing the game balls as much as possible during the short-time game state.

  Here, the lottery in the first special symbol success / failure determination means 704 and the second special symbol success / failure determination means 714 will be described with reference to Tables 1 and 2. Table 1 is a table showing winning probabilities and random numbers. Table 2 is a table for determining the type of jackpot game when the jackpot is won.

  As shown in Table 1, one of the 631 random numbers from 0 to 630 is extracted by the random number extracting means 702 for determination per first special symbol and the random number extracting means 712 for determination per second special symbol. First, it is determined by the first special symbol success / failure determination means 704 or the second special symbol success / failure determination means 714 based on Table 1 whether or not the extracted random number value is won. Specifically, first, the gaming state is determined. If the gaming state is the normal gaming state, 7 and 317 are random numbers, and if the gaming state is the probability variation gaming state, 7, 37, 67, 97, 127, 157. , 187, 217, 247, 277, 307, 337, 367, 397, 427, 457, 487, 517, 547, 577 are jackpot random numbers. Note that the same table is used according to the gaming state in the hit determination by the first special symbol success / failure determination means 704 and the hit determination by the second special symbol success / failure determination means 714. That is, when the determination of winning by the first special symbol success / failure determination means 704 is performed using the special symbol probability change per-time determination table 708, the determination of winning by the second special symbol probability change determination means 714 is also performed at the time of special symbol probability change. When the winning determination table 708 is used and the winning determination by the first special symbol success / failure determination means 704 is performed using the first special symbol normal time winning determination table 706, the second special symbol determination determination is made. The determination of winning by means 714 is also performed using the first special symbol normal hour determination table 706.

  Then, if it is determined that the extracted random number is a jackpot random number, the type of jackpot is determined based on Table 2. A jackpot game corresponding to the determined jackpot is played. The types of jackpots include long hits where the jackpot game is long and a large amount of game balls can be expected to be paid out, and short hits where the jackpot game is short. In the long win, the per jackpot game (hereinafter referred to as "long win game" corresponding to the long win) is a "probable change short short length" in which both the probabilistic gaming state and the short-time gaming state occur, There is a “ordinary long hit” in which only the short-time gaming state occurs (the probability variation gaming state does not occur) after the end of the long hitting game. For short wins, after the jackpot game (hereinafter, the jackpot game corresponding to the short win is referred to as “short win game”), only a probable game state occurs (no short-time game state occurs). In addition, there is “probability short shortening short chance” in which both a probability change gaming state and a time saving gaming state occur after the short winning game ends.

  On the other hand, if the random number extracted by the first special symbol determination random number extraction means 702 and the second special symbol determination random number extraction means 712 is not a winning random number, whether or not a small hit is won is displayed. 1 is determined by the first special symbol success / failure determination means 704 or the second special symbol success / failure determination means 714. Specifically, regardless of the gaming state, 16, 92, 133, 321, 465, 501, 568, and 610 are small random numbers. When it is determined that the extracted random number is a small hit random number, the small hit game is executed by the small hit game execution means 746. As described above, according to Table 1, the winning probability for jackpot is 2/631, and the winning probability for jackpot is 8/631.

  In this way, even if the jackpot is not won, it can be expected to win the jackpot. In addition, since the probability of winning the jackpot is set higher than the probability of winning the jackpot, every time a player wins the jackpot, the player always feels that he has won the jackpot. It can have, and can suppress the fall of interest. Furthermore, since the player will continue to play the game, it will also benefit the hall where the operating rate of the pachinko machine is improved. In addition, in response to the random numbers extracted by the first special symbol determination random number extracting means 702 or the second special symbol determination random number extracting means 712, the big win winning is determined prior to the small winning winning determination. The In other words, if the winning of the small win is first, the winning determination of the big win will not be performed if the winning of the small win is made, but the determination of the big win is made prior to the determination of the small win winning as in this embodiment. If the winning is determined, the jackpot winning is always performed, and it is possible to suppress a decrease in interest. In addition, since the determination of the big win is made only when the big win is not won, the big win and the small win do not overlap. If the big win and the small win are duplicated, it will be necessary to decide which one will be the winner and it will be complicated in terms of control, but the big win was not won as in this embodiment. The control load can be reduced by making a determination of winning a small hit only occasionally. In addition, two lottery opportunities for jackpot determination and small hit determination are given, and a decrease in interest can be suppressed.

  It should be noted that the tables used for the hit determination by the first special symbol success / failure determination means 704 and the second special symbol success / failure determination means 714 do not necessarily need to be the same table. The first special symbol success / failure determination means 704 and the second special symbol success / failure determination means 704 Different tables may be used for each of the determination units 714. Even in such a case, if the probability variation gaming state, the first special symbol success / failure determination means 704 and the second special symbol success / failure determination means 714 both use the probability variation gaming state table, and the normal gaming state For example, it is preferable that a table for a normal gaming state is used for both the first special symbol success / failure determination means 704 and the second special symbol success / failure determination means 714. Thereby, even if the starting opening where a game ball wins is different, the same gaming state is obtained, so that the game is not complicated, and consequently, a decrease in interest can be suppressed.

  Further, the determination result of the first special symbol determination unit 704, the second special symbol determination unit 714, and the normal symbol determination unit 724 does not necessarily include a deviation. For example, if the jackpot game is a game in which the opening / closing operation of the jackpot game opening / closing device 400 is executed for a very short time, if the jackpot game is not won, all of the jackpot games may be won.

  In addition, as in the present embodiment, it is first determined whether or not the jackpot has been won, and when determining whether or not the jackpot is won when the jackpot is not won, a remarkable effect is brought about. In addition, it may be drawn in a lump on whether or not the big win and the small win are won.

  Further, in the present embodiment, when the winning by the first special symbol lottery means 700 or the second special symbol lottery means 710 is won per short time for the probable change time and when winning for the short time for the probable change time, the short time for the probable change is given. The gaming state after the long winning game and the short winning game with the probability change time is finished becomes the probability changing game state. It can be understood from the display mode on the effect display device 115 that the gaming state at this time is the probability changing game state. On the other hand, when the normal short win is won, the game state after the normal short win game ends becomes the probability change game state, but the display on the effect display device 115 indicates that the game state at this time is the probability change game state. It cannot be grasped from the aspect. That is, a display mode in which the display mode displayed on the effect display device 115 in the probability-changing game state after the normal short hit game ends and the display mode displayed on the effect display device 115 in the normal game state are similar to each other. It becomes. Here, the “similar display mode” may be the same or similar so that the player cannot grasp whether the current gaming state is the normal gaming state or the probability-changing gaming state.

  The third start opening / closing control means 728 operates the normal electric accessory solenoid 638 to open / close the pair of movable pieces 396 when the lottery result determined by the normal symbol determination unit 724 is correct. When the pair of movable pieces 396 opens and closes, it becomes easy for a game ball to win a prize at the third start port 394. When the pair of movable pieces 396 are in the closed state, it is impossible to win a game ball in the third start port 394, or a game ball win in the third start port 394 is the first start. Although it is more difficult than winning a game ball to the mouth 390 and the second starting port 392, when the pair of movable pieces 396 are in the open state, the winning of the game ball to the third starting port 394 is as follows. It becomes easier than winning a game ball to the start port 390 and the second start port 392. In the present embodiment, the winning of the game ball to the second starting port 392 is configured more difficult than the winning of the game ball to the first starting port 390.

  The command transmission means 749 transmits the lottery result by the first special symbol success / failure judgment means 704 or the second special symbol success / failure judgment means 714 and information related to the lottery result to the peripheral board 660. The “information related to the lottery result” corresponds to an effect time or the like performed in the effect display device 115.

  The peripheral control board 662 includes command receiving means 750, effect lottery means 760, and effect accessory operation executing means 762.

  The command receiving unit 750 receives the lottery result and information related to the lottery result transmitted from the main control board 131 by the first special symbol acceptability judging unit 704 or the second special symbol acceptability judging unit 714.

  The effect lottery means 760 determines by lottery whether or not an effect by the floating body driving device 20 is performed. As a result of the lottery by the effect lottery means 760, when it is determined that the effect by the floating body drive device 20 is to be performed, the effect lottery means 760 passes the lamp drive board 688 and the center decoration drive unit relay terminal plate 694 through the floating body drive board. 500 is operated to produce an effect by the floating body drive device 20. The effect accessory operation executing means 762 controls the floating body driving device 20 via the floating body driving substrate 500 such as a floating operation of the floating body Z.

  In the present embodiment, the production-use accessory operation execution means 762 controls the floating body driving device 20 to perform the floating operation of the floating body Z via the floating body driving substrate 500. Specifically, the carriage motor 24 is driven to move the carriage 285 in the left-right direction to the current position of the floating body Z detected by the distance sensor 26. Then, the fan motor 25 is driven to perform a blowing operation by the blowing fan 284, and the floating body Z is floated. Further, the driving of the carriage motor 24 and the fan motor 25 is controlled based on the movement position information.

  This movement position information is, for example, continuous coordinate information including a pair of an X position indicating the movement destination of the floating body Z in the left-right direction and a Y position indicating the movement destination of the floating body Z in the vertical position. Based on the current position of the carriage 285 detected by the carriage motor sensor 250, the carriage motor 24 is driven so as to move the carriage 285 (that is, the floating body Z following the carriage 285) to the X position. At the same time, based on the blowing speed (wind pressure) by the blowing fan 284 detected by the fan motor sensor 251, the fan motor is set so that the blowing speed (wind pressure) of the blowing fan 284 becomes a size that allows the floating body Z to reach the Y position. 25 is driven. By continuously controlling the drive of the carriage motor 24 and the fan motor 25 based on such movement position information, the floating body Z can be arbitrarily floated inside the transparent case 21 (floating body movement region 200). it can.

  Note that heating or cooling control by the Peltier module 29 is performed to adjust the blowing temperature of the blowing fan 284 based on the current blowing temperature of the blowing fan 284 detected by the temperature sensor 249.

[About the display area of the effect display device]
This will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 24 is a front view of the effect display device. As shown in FIG. 24, the effect display device 115 has a first determination result display area 115a, a second determination result display area 115b, a common symbol display area 115c, and a hold display area 1150. .

  The first determination result display area 115a corresponds to the lottery result by the first special symbol lottery means 700, more specifically, the lottery result by the first special symbol lottery means 700 displayed on the first special symbol display unit 84. This is the area where the results are displayed.

  The second determination result display area 115b corresponds to the lottery result by the second special symbol lottery means 710, more specifically, the lottery result by the second special symbol lottery means 710 displayed on the second special symbol display unit 86. This is the area where the results are displayed.

  The first determination result display area 115 a and the second determination result display area 115 b are arranged in the lower left area of the effect display device 115. Each has a display unit capable of displaying a plurality of colors, and a lottery by the first special symbol lottery means 700 and the second special symbol lottery means 710 according to the display pattern displayed after performing a predetermined effect. The result is derived. However, the lottery result is not derived at the same time in the first determination result display area 115a and the second determination result display area 115b, and is derived based on the order in which the game balls are won at the respective start ports 390, 392, 394. .

  The common symbol display area 115c is an area for deriving one of the lottery results of the first special symbol lottery means 700 and the second special symbol lottery means 710. In the common symbol display area 115c, one symbol group composed of a plurality of (for example, three) symbol rows is displayed, and after the variation effect of this one symbol group is performed, a lottery result is obtained by the combination of symbols stopped. Is derived. The variation effect time of one symbol group is the same as or substantially the same as the above-described variation time. The common symbol display area 115c occupies at least two-thirds or more of all display areas in the effect display device 115. The first determination result display area 115a, the second determination result display area 115b, and the hold display area 1150 are clearly partitioned. Thus, the player grasps the lottery result by the first special symbol lottery means 700 or the second special symbol lottery means 710 by a combination of one symbol group displayed in the common symbol display area 115c.

  The lottery results derived to the common symbol display area 115c are derived in the order in which the game balls win the respective start openings 390, 392, 394. That is, since the lottery result by the first special symbol lottery means 700 and the lottery result by the second special symbol lottery means 710 are not derived simultaneously, one symbol group includes the first special symbol lottery means 700 and the second special symbol lottery means 700. It functions as a common symbol for deriving a lottery result in the symbol lottery means 710. Thereby, even if the lottery is performed by both the first special symbol lottery means 700 and the second special symbol lottery means 710, it becomes a very clear configuration as seen from the player, and it is possible to suppress a decrease in interest. .

  Note that one symbol group displayed in the common symbol display area 115c differs between an effect of deriving a lottery result by the first special symbol lottery means 700 and an effect of deriving a lottery result by the second special symbol lottery means 710. Production is performed in a manner.

  Specifically, when the lottery result by the first special symbol lottery means 700 is derived to the common symbol display area 115c, any one of the variation effect patterns is selected and executed. . A variation effect is performed based on the selected variation effect pattern.

  When the selected variation effect pattern is a deviation variation that does not reach, the variation effect pattern is set according to the number of reservations in the first special symbol reservation counter 703. For example, if the number of reserves in the first special symbol hold counter 703 is 3 or more, the fluctuation time is relatively long and the fluctuation effect is performed. If the number of holds in the first special symbol hold counter 703 is 2 or less, An off-change effect is performed with a shorter change time than when the number of holds in the first special symbol hold counter 703 is 3 or more. Here, “displacement fluctuation” is a fluctuation in which the lottery result by the first special symbol lottery means 700 is out and the reach effect is not performed.

  On the other hand, when the lottery result by the second special symbol lottery means 710 is derived to the common symbol display area 115c, the variation effect is performed based on a predetermined variation effect pattern. In the present embodiment, this specific variation effect pattern is a variation accompanied by a reach effect (hereinafter referred to as “reach variation”). However, when the so-called “short-time gaming state” in which the lottery by the normal symbol lottery means 720 is advantageous to the player is occurring, another variation effect different from the reach variation is performed.

  Thus, in the case where the lottery result by the first special symbol lottery means 700 is derived to the common symbol display area 115c and the case where the lottery result by the second special symbol lottery means 710 is derived to the common symbol display area 115c, The degree of interest that the person is attracted to the common symbol display area 115c will be different. That is, when the lottery result by the second special symbol lottery means 710 is derived to the common symbol display area 115c, a reach effect is performed. Therefore, when the lottery result by the first special symbol lottery means 700 is derived to the common symbol display area 115c and when the lottery result by the second special symbol lottery means 710 is derived to the common symbol display area 115c, Since the variation mode is different, a monotonous game can be avoided and a decrease in interest can be suppressed.

  The hold display area 1150 is arranged in the lower right area of the effect display device 115, and includes a first hold display area 1151 and a second hold display area 1152. The first hold display area 1151 and the second hold display area 1152 are adjacent to each other.

  The first hold display area 1151 has four hold storage display sections, a first hold storage display section 1151a to a fourth hold storage display section 1151d arranged in a line in the left-right direction. The second hold display area 1152 has four hold storage display sections, a fifth hold storage display section 1152a to an eighth hold storage display section 1152d arranged in a line in the left-right direction. That is, the sum of the hold storage display section of the first hold display area 1151 and the hold storage display section of the second hold display area 1152, the upper limit value (first predetermined number) of the hold by the first special symbol hold counter 703, and the first The sum of the upper limit value (second predetermined number) of holding by the 2 special symbol holding counter 713 is the same number. More specifically, the number of the reserved storage display parts in the first hold display area 1151 is equal to the first predetermined number, and the number of the hold display parts in the second hold display area 1152 is equal to the second predetermined number. The number is the same.

  In addition, the first reserved storage display unit 1151a, the second reserved storage display unit 1151b, the third reserved storage display unit 1151c, the fourth reserved storage display unit 1151d, the fifth reserved storage display unit 1152a, the sixth The on-hold storage display unit 1152b, the seventh on-hold storage display unit 1152c, and the eighth on-hold storage display unit 1152d are regularly arranged in this order in the left-right direction, and the derivation to the common symbol display area 115c is as described above. Derived in the order listed. Thereby, the order derived | led-out to the common symbol display area 115c can be grasped | ascertained clearly.

  Each hold storage display unit 1151a to 1151d in the first hold display area 1151 is held by the first special symbol hold counter 713, which is a first display mode indicating that the hold can be held by the first special symbol hold counter 703. Is displayed in any one of the second display mode indicating that it is held and the third display mode indicating that it is held by the first special symbol hold counter 703.

  Each hold storage display unit 1152a to 1152d in the second hold display area 1152 can be displayed in any one of the first display mode, the second display mode, and the third display mode, and the first Information regarding the number of holds in the special symbol hold counter 703 and the second special symbol hold counter 713 may be hidden.

  Each display mode will be described. In FIG. 24, the display modes of the first hold storage display unit 1151a, the second hold storage display unit 1151b, the fifth hold storage display unit 1152a, and the seventh hold storage display unit 1152c are as follows. It is the third display mode, and the display mode of the third hold storage display unit 1151c, the fourth hold storage display unit 1151d, the sixth hold storage display unit 1152b, and the eighth hold storage display unit 1152d is the second display mode. It is a display mode.

  In the present embodiment, the first display mode indicates that a frame (inside the frame is gray) is displayed and can be reserved by the first special symbol hold counter 703. In the second display mode, blue is displayed, which means that the second special symbol hold counter 713 holds it. The third display mode is displayed in red, which means that it is held by the first special symbol hold counter 703. Thus, the display mode is different between the display mode meaning that the first special symbol hold counter 703 holds and the display mode which means that the second special symbol hold counter 713 holds. .

  In the present embodiment, a plurality of planetary stages each having a motif of each planet are provided. During normal games (that is, in a state where no jackpot game or short-time game is performed) And the game proceeds. For example, the “Earth Stage” with the Earth as the motif and the “Mars Stage” with the Mars as the motif. In the common symbol display area 115c, a stage image corresponding to the current planetary stage is displayed as a background effect of the symbol group. These stage images are also stored in the image ROM 686. When another planetary stage is selected and executed instead of the current planetary stage according to the establishment of a predetermined condition, a stage image corresponding to the other planetary stage is displayed as a background effect in the common symbol display area 115c. Thereafter, the game proceeds under the other planetary stage. Note that the effect display device 115 shown in FIG. 24 exemplifies the case of “Earth stage”, and a stage image corresponding to “Earth stage” is displayed in the common symbol display area 115c.

[Functional configuration of display device control board]
FIG. 25 is a block diagram showing a functional configuration of the display device control board in the peripheral board. As shown in FIG. 25, the display device control board 116 includes a first special symbol image display control means 851, a second special symbol image display control means 852, an effect image display control means 800, and a merge hold display control means 860. And a merged reservation order storage means 870, a first special symbol reservation number storage means 872, a second special symbol reservation number storage means 874, and an effect reservation count means 855. The merge hold display control means 860 further includes a holdable information image display control means 8601, a first hold information image display control means 8602, a second hold information image display control means 8603, an identification code image display control means 8604, and a merge hold order. Image display control means 8605 is included. The display device control board 116 receives a command transmitted from the main control board 131 via the command receiving means 750 of the peripheral control board 662.

  The first special symbol image display control means 851 derives and displays the lottery result by the first special symbol lottery means 700 after performing a predetermined effect in the first determination result display area 115a.

  The second special symbol image display control means 852 derives and displays the lottery result by the second special symbol lottery means 710 after performing a predetermined effect in the second determination result display area 115b.

  The effect image display control means 800 specifies that the command receiving means 750 has won the first start opening 390 and the second and third start openings 392, 394 from the main control board 131. One of the lottery results of the lottery result by the first special symbol lottery means 700 and the lottery result by the second special symbol lottery means 710 is derived and displayed in the common symbol display area 115c.

  In the common symbol display area 115c, when a predetermined effect for deriving a lottery result by the first special symbol lottery means 700 (that is, a variable display of symbols) is performed, the second special symbol lottery means 710 A predetermined effect for deriving the lottery result is not performed. Further, when the predetermined effect for deriving the lottery result by the second special symbol lottery means 710 is performed, the predetermined effect for deriving the lottery result by the first special symbol lottery means 700 is not performed.

  The merge hold display control means 860 is held by the first special symbol hold counter 703, the derivation order of the lottery results derived by the first special symbol lottery means 700 or the second special symbol lottery means 710 derived in the common symbol display area 115c. The hold number information and the hold number information held by the second special symbol hold counter 713 are displayed and controlled so that they can be recognized in the hold display area 1150.

  Further, the merge hold display control means 860 performs display control so that the hold related information relating to the first special symbol hold counter 703 and the second special symbol hold counter 713 can be recognized in the hold display area 1150.

  Here, the “holding related information” is, for example, the holding number information indicating the number held by the first special symbol holding counter 703 or the second special symbol holding counter 713, the first special symbol holding counter 703 or the second Holdable information indicating that the special symbol hold counter 713 can hold, the lottery result based on the hold by the first special symbol hold counter 703 (that is, the lottery result by the first special symbol lottery means 700) and the second special symbol A lottery result based on hold by the hold counter 713 (that is, a lottery result by the second special symbol lottery means 710) corresponds to a hold derivation order indicating the order in which the lottery result is drawn to the common symbol display area 115c.

  Further, the holdable information image display control means 8601 is configured so that each of the first special symbol hold counter 703 and the second special symbol hold counter 713 has a predetermined first value for the holdable information which is one of the hold related information. Despite being able to hold up to an upper limit of a predetermined number (for example, 4) and a second predetermined number (for example, 4), only the holding by the first special symbol holding counter 703 can be held up to the first predetermined number. Is displayed in the hold display area 1150.

  The first hold information image display control means 8602 and the second hold information image display control means 8603 are each a hold number information and a second special symbol applied to the first special symbol hold counter 703 which is one of the hold related information. The number-of-holds information relating to the hold counter 713 is displayed in the hold display area 1150.

  The identification code image display control means 8604 is the number-of-holds information and the second special symbol hold on the first special symbol hold counter 703 displayed by the first hold information image display control means 8602 and the second hold information image display control means 8603. A predetermined identification code is added to the number-of-holds information on the counter 713 and displayed.

  The merge reservation order image display control means 8605 is derived to the common symbol display area 115c when the number of holds by the first special symbol hold counter 703 and the number of holds by the second special symbol hold counter 713 are 1 or more. The derivation order is displayed in a recognizable manner.

  The merging hold order storage means 870 stores the derivation order of the lottery results by the first special symbol lottery means 700 or the second special symbol lottery means 710 derived to the common symbol display area 115c. More specifically, information for specifying that the command receiving means 750 has won each of the start ports 390, 392, 394 is stored based on the order received from the main control board 131.

  The first special symbol holding number storage means 872 receives a command from the main control board 131 for the command receiving means 750 to specify that “the first starting port 390 has been won”, and is still drawn in the common symbol display area 115c. The number of results that are not derived and displayed is stored. This number corresponds to the number of reservations in the first special symbol reservation counter 703.

  The second special symbol holding number storage means 874 receives a command from the main control board 131 for specifying that the command receiving means 750 “wins the second and third starting openings 392 and 394” and is still a common symbol. The number of lottery results not being derived and displayed is stored in the display area 115c. This number corresponds to the number of reservations in the second special symbol reservation counter 713.

  The production hold count means 855 will be described in detail later, but when the production point P reaches 10 points, the special production until the change based on the hold that triggered the production point P to 10 points is performed. This is a counter for holding display.

  Next, various control processes executed on the main board 600 according to the game progress of the pachinko machine 1 will be described.

[Main system processing]
First, a description will be given based on FIG. FIG. 26 is a flowchart illustrating an example of main system processing executed by the CPU mounted on the main control board of the main board.

  As shown in FIG. 26, when power is supplied to the pachinko machine 1, the CPU 602 (see FIG. 21) first executes a power-on process (step S10). In this power-on process, it is determined whether or not the backup data stored in the RAM 606 (see FIG. 21) is normal (is a set value when a power failure occurs). A process for returning to the state at the time of power failure occurrence (recovery process) is executed according to the backup data stored, and if the backup data is abnormal, the backup data stored in the RAM 606 is erased and the device setting related to the CPU 602 (normally Initial settings and interrupt timing settings). When the power supply to the pachinko machine 1 is stopped during the game, the current game state is stored in the RAM 606 as backup data. If the RAM erase switch for instructing the deletion of the backup data stored in the RAM 606 is turned on in the power-on process, the RAM 606 is cleared and normal initialization is performed. If backup data is not stored in the RAM 606 mounted on the main control board 131 in the power-on process, the RAM 606 is cleared and normal initial setting is performed. Further, in the power-on process, a state in which a power-on command indicating that the main control board 131 (see FIG. 21) is activated can be transmitted to the peripheral control board 662 (see FIG. 22) when normal initial setting is executed. The process of setting to is also executed. The power-on command notifies the peripheral control board 662 that the main control board 131 has been activated. In addition, when the power supply to the pachinko machine 1 is stopped (when the power is turned off) when the amusement store is closed, the backup data is also stored in the RAM 606, and when the power supply to the pachinko machine 1 is started again, the power is supplied. Processing at the time of execution is executed.

  When the power-on process (step S10) ends, the CPU 602 starts a loop process that repeatedly executes each process for gaming. At the start of this loop process, the CPU 602 first determines whether or not a power failure notice signal has been detected (step S20). In this embodiment, the power supply voltage used in the pachinko machine 1 is generated by a power supply board (not shown). That is, since a plurality of types of devices mounted on the pachinko machine 1 operate with different power supply voltages, the power supply voltage supplied from the external power supply to the pachinko machine 1 is converted into a predetermined power supply voltage on the power supply board, Power is supplied to the device. Then, when a power failure occurs and the power supply voltage supplied from the external power supply to the power supply board becomes equal to or lower than the predetermined power supply voltage, a power failure notice signal indicating that the supply of power supply voltage from the power supply board to the main control board 131 is stopped is transmitted. Is done. Then, when the power failure notice signal is detected by the CPU 602 mounted on the main control board 131 in step S20, processing at the time of occurrence of power interruption is executed (step S40).

  When the power cut occurs, the operation of the gaming machine is performed before the power failure when the power supply voltage supplied to the power board after the power failure is restored (24V in this embodiment) (hereinafter referred to as “power recovery”). In order to start from the state, the state at the time of occurrence of a power failure is stored in the RAM 606 as backup data. Although the processing content will be described later, in the present embodiment, as shown in the figure, the processing at the time of power-off occurrence is not an interrupt processing, but a branch processing that is executed immediately after the start of the loop depending on whether or not a power failure warning signal is detected. It is incorporated in the main process (main control process).

  If the power failure warning signal is not detected in step S20 (NO in step S20), that is, if the power from the external power supply is normally supplied, the non-winning random number update for updating the random number used in the game Processing is performed (step S30). Note that the random numbers updated in the non-winning random number update process will be described later.

[Power failure occurrence processing]
FIG. 27 is a flowchart illustrating an example of processing upon occurrence of power interruption. As described above, the power interruption occurrence process (step S40) is a process executed when a power failure warning signal is detected in the main system process (YES in step S20). First, the CPU 602 performs an interrupt prohibition setting so that the interrupt process is not executed (step S42). Then, the checksum of the RAM 606 is calculated and stored in a predetermined area of the RAM 606 (step S44). This checksum is used to check whether or not the contents of the RAM 606 before the power failure is retained at the time of power recovery.

  Next, the CPU 602 sets a specified value indicating that the process at the time of power-off occurrence has been performed in a backup flag provided in a predetermined area of the RAM 606 (step S46). When the above processing is completed, the CPU 602 prohibits access to the RAM 606 (step S48) and enters an infinite loop to prepare for the stop of power supply. In this process, if the power supply voltage becomes unstable due to a very short power failure, etc. (hereinafter referred to as “instantaneous power interruption”), the process at the time of the occurrence of power interruption has started. Since the power supply voltage is not stopped, there is a possibility that the process described above cannot return from the infinite loop. In order to avoid such adverse effects, the CPU 602 of the present embodiment is provided with a watchdog timer, and is configured to be reset if the watchdog timer is not updated for a predetermined time. The watchdog timer is periodically updated while the process is normally performed, but is not updated when the process when the power is cut off is entered. As a result, even when the power interruption occurs due to a momentary power failure and the infinite loop of FIG. 27 is entered, a reset is applied after a predetermined period of time, and the CPU 602 is started in the same process as when the power is turned on.

[Timer interrupt processing]
FIG. 28 is a flowchart illustrating an example of timer interrupt processing. In the present embodiment, a timer interrupt process is executed every 4 ms by the CPU 602 mounted on the main control board 131 of the main board 600 during execution of the main system process. In the timer interrupt process, the CPU 602 executes the process from step S60 to step S270 after executing the register standby process (step S50).

  In the sensor monitoring process in step S60, the above-described various sensors (gate sensor 630, first start port sensor 644, second start port sensor 646, third start port sensor 648, jackpot game opening / closing device count sensor 640, etc.) are processed. A process for monitoring the detection signal is executed.

  In the winning random number update process of step S70, a process of updating a random number used in the game is executed. In this embodiment, the random number updated in the winning random number update process is different from the random number updated in the non-winning random number update process. Although the random number will be described later, the random number updated in the winning random number updating process may be updated in the non-winning random number updating process.

  In the payout control process in step S80, a payout command for instructing payout of the game ball is transmitted to the payout control board 197 based on the signal detected in the sensor monitoring process (step S60).

  In the normal symbol / ordinary electric accessory control process in step S90, the control process related to the normal symbol display 82 is executed based on the signal detected from the gate sensor 630 in the sensor monitoring process (step S60). The process for performing the opening / closing control of the movable piece 396 is executed.

  In the special symbol / special electric accessory control process in step S100, a series of processes from the start of the change of the special symbol to the start of the winning game are executed, and the big winning game prize winning port 400a (see FIG. 10 for both) is opened and closed. A process for performing control is executed.

  In the output data setting process of step S260, a process of generating a command to be transmitted from the main control board 131 to the peripheral control board 662 is executed based on information determined in the special symbol / special electric accessory control process (step S100). .

  In the command transmission processing in step S270, processing for transmitting the command set in the output data setting processing (step S260) to the peripheral control board 662 is performed. When the processing from step S60 to step S270 is executed, the register return processing (step S280) is executed, and the timer interrupt processing is terminated.

  Here, various random numbers that are updated by the CPU 602 mounted on the main control board 131 in the above-described non-winning random number updating process (step S30) and winning random number updating process (step S70) will be described. In this embodiment, as the various random numbers used in the game, when it is determined to start the jackpot game, the random number for determining whether or not to start the jackpot game, whether to start the jackpot game, Design random number used to determine whether or not to make a promising jackpot, to determine whether or not to reach reach when it is determined not to start a probabilistic jackpot game, non-probabilistic jackpot game and small hit game in jackpot judgment The reach determination random number used, the fluctuation pattern random number used to determine the fluctuation pattern of the special symbol displayed on the first special symbol display 84 and the second special symbol display 86, and the pair of movable pieces 396 are opened. There is a random number for normal symbol determination used for determining whether to control the state (normal symbol determination).

  Note that the variation pattern of the special symbol may be determined using the reach determination random number, and the variation pattern of the decorative symbol whose display is controlled by the effect display device 115 may be determined.

  Among these random numbers, in the winning random number update process, whether or not to determine the success / failure determination random number, the design random number, and the pair of movable pieces 396 related to the start of the big hit game or the small hit game are set to an open state in which the game ball can be easily received. The random number for judgment per ordinary symbol related to whether or not is updated. That is, the random numbers used for the start of the jackpot game and the determination regarding whether or not the pair of movable pieces 396 are controlled to be opened are updated every 4 ms as a fixed timing. By doing so, the probability (probability to determine that the hit game is started, probability to determine that the pair of movable pieces 396 are controlled to be opened) in a predetermined period in each random number can be made constant, and the game It is possible to prevent a person from becoming disadvantaged.

  On the other hand, in the non-winning random number update process, the reach determination random number and the fluctuation pattern random number irrespective of the occurrence of the winning gaming state and the normal symbol display result are updated. The random numbers updated on the main control board 131 are not limited to those described above. In the non-winning random number update processing, when the counter that updates the random number for determining whether or not has made one round, the determination is made to start counting next. The initial value determination random number or the like for determining the initial value of the random number is also updated.

  In the present embodiment, as means for obtaining the random number for determination of success / failure, two means, a random number extraction means for determination per first special symbol 702 and a random number extraction means for determination per second special symbol 712, are provided. It is good also as a structure which provides this.

[Special symbol / Special electric accessory control processing]
Next, the special symbol / special electric accessory control process will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 29 is a flowchart showing an example of the special symbol / special electric accessory control process. In the special symbol / special electric accessory control process, first, first, second, and third start opening winning processes (step S110) are performed. Specifically, as will be described later, it is determined whether or not a game ball is received in the first start port 390, the second start port 392, and the third start port 394, and a series of processing is performed based on this. Once the first, second, and third start opening winning process (step S110) is performed, the process flag is checked (steps S120 to S230), and the process corresponding to the process flag is performed.

  When the first, second, and third start opening winning processes (step S110) are finished, it is first determined whether or not the processing flag is 0 (step S120). If the processing flag is 0 (in step S120). YES) The fluctuation start process (step S130) is executed. In the variation start process (step S130), settings for starting the variation display of the special symbol are performed. As will be described later in detail, it is determined whether or not to start the big hit game or the small hit game, and the processing flag is updated to “1”. On the other hand, if the processing flag is not 0 in step S120 (NO in step S120), the process proceeds to step S140.

  In step S140, it is determined whether or not the processing flag is 1 (step S140). If the process flag is 1 (YES in step S140), the variation pattern setting process (step S150) is executed. In this variation pattern setting process, the variation pattern of the special symbol displayed on the first special symbol display 84 or the second special symbol display 86 and the decorative symbol displayed on the effect display device 115 is determined, and the variation pattern is set as the variation pattern. A correspondingly set fluctuation time (the time from the start of the special symbol fluctuation display to the stop display on either the first special symbol display 84 or the second special symbol display 86) is set in the timer. The processing flag is updated to “2”. On the other hand, if the processing flag is not 1 in step S140 (NO in step S140), the process proceeds to step S170.

  In step S170, it is determined whether or not the processing flag is 2 (step S170). If the process flag is 2 (YES in step S170), the process during change (step S180) is executed. In the changing process, the changing time set in the changing pattern setting process (step S150) is monitored by a timer, and the special symbol in the first special symbol display 84 or the second special symbol display 86 is determined based on the time-out. The fluctuation display of is stopped. At this time, if it is determined that the big hit is made in the variation start process (step S130), the process selection flag is updated to “3”. If neither the big win nor the small win is determined, the process selection flag is updated to “0”. On the other hand, if the processing flag is not 2 in step S170 (NO in step S170), the process proceeds to step S190.

  In step S190, it is determined whether the processing flag is 3 (step S190). If the process flag is 3 (YES in step S190), a big hit game start process (step S200) is executed. In this jackpot game start processing, the jackpot type (long hit or short hit) is determined, and the number of rounds, the opening time and the game ball for controlling the opening / closing operation of the jackpot game big winning opening 400a according to the jackpot type And the processing flag is updated to “5”. On the other hand, if the processing flag is not 3 in step S190 (NO in step S190), the process proceeds to step S210.

  In step S210, it is determined whether or not the processing flag is 4 (step S210). If the process flag is 4 (YES in step S210), a small hit game process (step S220) is executed. In this small hit game process, the number of releases and the open time for controlling the opening operation of the big winning game winning prize opening 400a are set, and the processing flag is updated to “6”. On the other hand, if the processing flag is not 4 (NO in step S210), the process proceeds to step S230.

  In step S230, it is determined whether the processing flag is 5 (step S230). If the process flag is 5 (YES in step S230), a special electric utility jackpot control process (step S240) is executed. In the special electric utility jackpot control process, the opening / closing operation of the jackpot gaming big prize opening 400a is controlled based on the number of rounds set in the jackpot gaming start process (step S200), the opening time and the number of game balls to be awarded, When the big hit game ends, it is determined whether or not to operate the probability variation function and the time reduction function, and the process flag is updated to “0”.

  On the other hand, if the process flag is not 5 in step S230 (NO in step S230), the special electric accessory small hit control process (step S250) is executed. In the special electric accessory small hitting control process (step S250), the opening / closing operation of the big winning game winning prize opening 400a is controlled based on the number of times of opening, the opening time and the limited number set in the small hitting game process (step S220). When the small hit game ends, processing for updating the processing flag to “0” is performed.

  When any of the various processes from step S130 to step S250 is executed, the special symbol / special electric accessory control process is terminated.

[Random number storage means for special symbols]
Next, a storage method using the hold order storage means will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 30 is a diagram illustrating an example of a storage area related to the hold order. A RAM 606 (see FIG. 21) provided in the CPU 602 of the main control board 131 has a special symbol random number storage area 6061 and a processing area 6062. Various data (random determination number, symbol random number, special symbol type) acquired based on the detection of the game ball by the first start port sensor 644, and the second start port sensor 646 or the third start port sensor 648 The various data acquired based on the fact that the game ball was detected (random number for success / failure determination, symbol random number, special symbol type) is stored in the special symbol random number storage area 6061 by the holding order storage unit 790 in the order in which the game balls are detected. Remembered. The special symbol random number storage area 6061 is divided into eight storage areas from a first storage area 6061a to an eighth storage area 6061h. The first storage area 6061a, the second storage area 6061b, the third storage area 6061c, The fourth storage area 6061d, the fifth storage area 6061e, the sixth storage area 6061f, the seventh storage area 6061g, and the eighth storage area 6061h are stored in this order.

  Each of the eight storage areas from the first storage area 6061a to the eighth storage area 6061h and the processing area 6062 has three storages: a random number storage area for determination of success / failure, a random number storage area for probability variation determination, and a special symbol type storage area. Has an area. The determination random number storage area is an area for storing a determination random number used for determining whether to start a big hit game or a small hit game. In addition, the random number storage area for probability variation determination stores a symbol random number used for determining whether or not the stop symbol pattern of the first special symbol display 84 or the second special symbol display 86 is a probability variation symbol in the case of a big hit. It is an area to do. In the special symbol type storage area, whether the success / failure determination random number and the symbol random number are data acquired by detecting the game ball in the first starting port sensor 644, the second starting port sensor 646 or the third This is an area for storing whether the data is acquired by detecting the game ball in the start port sensor 648. In the present embodiment, when the success / failure determination random number and the design random number are extracted by the detection of the game ball by the first start port sensor 644, the first special symbol type is set as the second start port sensor 646 or the second start number sensor 644. If it is extracted by the detection of the game ball by the 3 start sensor 648, the second special symbol type is stored.

  When the first start port sensor 644 detects a game ball, the first special symbol per-determination random number extraction means 702 extracts the winning / failure determination random number and the design random number. The extracted success / failure random numbers and design random numbers are stored in the success / failure determination random number storage area and the probability variation determination random number storage area by the hold order storage unit 790, respectively. Further, the first special symbol type is stored in the special symbol type storage area.

  When a game ball is detected by the second start port sensor 646 or the third start port sensor 648, a random number for determination per second special symbol is extracted in the same manner as when a game ball is detected by the first start port sensor 644. The means 712 extracts a random number for determination of success / failure and a design random number. The extracted success / failure determination random numbers and symbol random numbers are stored in the determination / non-permission determination random number storage area and the probability variation determination random number storage area, respectively. Further, the second special symbol type is stored in the special symbol type storage area.

  The processing area 6062 is an area that is read when the determination results of various data are derived to the first special symbol display 84 or the second special symbol display 86. In the present embodiment, reading of various data stored in each of the areas 6061a to 6061h of the special symbol random number storage area 6061 is restricted, and various data stored in the processing area 6062 is determined, and the determination result Is led to the first special symbol display 84 or the second special symbol display 86.

  Note that the processing region 6062 is not necessarily provided. For example, the reading of various data stored in each of the storage areas 6061a to 6061h of the special symbol random number storage area 6061 is normally restricted, and is stored in the first storage area 6061a only when the change of the special symbol is started. Only various data may be read.

  In addition, when the change of the special symbol is started, a shift process of various data stored in each storage area is performed. Details of this shift processing will be described later.

[First, second and third start-up winning prizes]
Next, the first, second, and third start opening prize winning processes will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 31 is a flowchart showing an example of the first, second, and third start-up prize winning processes.

  In the first, second, and third starting opening winning process, the CPU 602 first determines whether or not a game ball has won a second starting opening 392 or a third starting opening 394 (step S1101). Specifically, it is determined whether a detection signal is output from second start port sensor 646 or third start port sensor 648. At this time, when a detection signal is output from the second start port sensor 646, it is determined that a game ball has won the second start port 392, and when a detection signal is output from the third start port sensor 648, It is determined that a game ball has won the third start port 394. If no detection signal is output from either the second start port sensor 646 or the third start port sensor 648, no game ball has won a prize in either the second start port 392 or the third start port 394 (step (NO in S1101).

  When it is determined in step S1101 that the game ball has won the second starting port 392 or the third starting port 394, various data (randomness number for determination, symbol random number, special symbol type) are acquired and provided in the RAM 606. It is determined whether or not the counter value of the second special symbol hold counter 713 is less than the upper limit of 4 (step S1102). Note that the random number for determination of success / failure is acquired by the random number extraction means 712 for determination per second special symbol.

  If it is determined in step S1101 that the counter value of the second special symbol hold counter 713 is less than the upper limit of 4 (YES in step S1102), the CPU 602 performs a second hold storage process (step S1103). In the second hold storage process, various data (random determination number, symbol random number, special symbol type) acquired by winning a game ball at the second starting port 392 or the third starting port 394 is stored as a special symbol random number. This is a process of adding 1 to the counter value of the second special symbol hold counter 713 while storing it in the area 6061. More specifically, in the special symbol random number storage area 6061, the random number storage region for determination of success / failure, the random number storage region for probability variation determination, the random number region for random determination, the special symbol type storage region, the special symbol type, Remember each one.

  Various data stored in the special symbol random number storage area 6061 in the second reserved storage process of step S1103 is the smallest among the empty areas of the first storage area 6061a to the nth storage area (n is an integer). After that, the process proceeds to step S1104. For example, if the first storage area 6061a is a free area, it is stored in the first storage area 6061a. If the first storage area 6061a is not a free area and the second storage area 6061b is a free area, it is stored in the second storage area 6061b. If the first storage area 6061a and the second storage area 6061b are not empty areas and the third storage area 6061c is an empty area, the CPU 602 stores various data in the third storage area 6061c, and the process proceeds to step S1104.

  When the CPU 602 determines in step S1101 that no game ball has won any of the second start port 392 and the third start port 394 (NO in step S1101), and in step S1102, the second special symbol hold counter. When it is determined that the counter value 713 has reached the upper limit of 4 (NO in step S1102), the process proceeds to step S1104.

  In step S1104, the CPU 602 determines whether or not a game ball has won the first start port 390 (step S1104). Specifically, it is determined whether or not a detection signal is output from the first start port sensor 644, and if a detection signal is output from the first start port sensor 644, a game ball wins the first start port 390. (YES in step S1104). If a detection signal is not output from the first start port sensor 644, it is determined that a game ball has not won the first start port 390 (NO in step S1104).

  When it is determined in step S1104 that a game ball has won at the first starting port 390, various random numbers (randomness number for success / failure determination, symbol random number, special symbol type) are acquired, and a first special symbol hold counter provided in the RAM 606 is obtained. It is determined whether the counter value of 703 is less than the upper limit of 4 (step S1105). Note that the random number for determination of success / failure is acquired by the random number extraction means 702 for determination per first special symbol.

  If it is determined in step S1104 that the counter value of the first special symbol hold counter 703 is less than the upper limit of 4 (YES in step S1105), the CPU 602 performs a first hold storage process (step S1106). In the first hold storage process, various data (random determination randomness, symbol random number, special symbol type) acquired by winning a game ball at the first starting port 390 are stored in the special symbol random number storage area 6061. In this process, 1 is added to the counter value of the first special symbol hold counter 703. More specifically, in the special symbol random number storage area 6061, the random number storage region for determination of success / failure, the random number storage region for probability variation determination, the random number region for random determination, the special symbol type storage region, the special symbol type, Remember each one.

  Various data stored in the special symbol random number storage area 6061 in the first reserved storage process of step S1106 is the area where n is the smallest among the free areas of the first storage area 6061a to the nth storage area (n is an integer). After that, the process proceeds to step S1104. For example, if the first storage area 6061a is a free area, it is stored in the first storage area 6061a. If the first storage area 6061a is not a free area and the second storage area 6061b is a free area, it is stored in the second storage area 6061b. If the first storage area 6061a and the second storage area 6061b are not empty areas and the third storage area 6061c is an empty area, the CPU 602 stores various data in the third storage area 6061c, and ends the processing.

  When the CPU 602 determines in step S1104 that a game ball has not won the first start port 390 (NO in step S1104), and in step S1105, the counter value of the first special symbol hold counter 703 is an upper limit value of 4. When it is determined that it has reached (NO in step S1105), the process ends.

  The counter value stored in the first special symbol hold counter 703 or the second special symbol hold counter 713 is the number of various data stored in the special symbol random number storage area 6061 acquired in step S1104 or step S1101 (that is, , 8 of the storage areas 6061a to 6061h, the number of storage areas in which various data are stored).

  Further, in step S1102 and step S1105, when the game ball wins the second start port 392 or the third start port 394, the counter value of the second special symbol holding counter 713 is the upper limit value, and the first start If the counter value of the first special symbol hold counter 703 is the upper limit when a game ball is won in the mouth 390, the various data acquired in step S1101 or step S1104 are discarded.

  When it is determined that a game ball has won the second start port 392 or the third start port 394, it is not always necessary to acquire various data (random number for success / failure determination, symbol random number, special symbol type) in step S1101. However, it may be performed between step S1101 to step S1103. For example, various data may be acquired after determining that the counter value of the second special symbol holding counter 713 is less than the upper limit value in step S1102 without acquiring various data in step S1101, or in step S1103. You may make it acquire by a 2nd pending | holding memory | storage process.

  Similarly, when it is determined that a game ball has won at the first starting port 390, acquisition of various data (randomness number for success / failure determination, symbol random number, special symbol type) is not necessarily performed in step S1104, and steps S1104 to S1104 are performed. What is necessary is just to perform between step S1106. For example, without acquiring various data in step S1104, it is possible to acquire various data after determining that the counter value of the first special symbol hold counter 703 is less than the upper limit value in step S1102, or in step S1106 You may make it acquire by a 1st pending | holding memory | storage process.

  As described above, in the first, second, and third start opening prize processing, the CPU 602 first determines whether or not a game ball has won the second start opening 392 or the third start opening 394, and the second special opening is determined. If the count value by the symbol hold counter 713 is less than the upper limit, storage processing of various data acquired by winning a game ball in the second start port 392 or the third start port 394 is performed. After that, it is determined whether or not a game ball has won at the first start opening 390, and if the count value by the first special symbol hold counter 703 is less than the upper limit, the game ball has won at the first start opening 390. Thus, the storage processing of the various data acquired is performed, and the series of processing ends. Accordingly, when the winning of the game ball to the first starting port 390 and the winning of the game ball to the second starting port 392 or the third starting port 394 are performed almost simultaneously (within the same 4 ms interrupt process). Is a special symbol in which various data acquired by winning a game ball at the second starting port 392 or the third starting port 394 is ahead of various data acquired by winning a game ball at the first starting port 390. Stored in the random number storage area 6061. That is, when the winning of the game ball to the first starting port 390 and the winning of the game ball to the second starting port 392 or the third starting port 394 are performed almost simultaneously, the second special symbol success / failure determination means. The jackpot determination by 714 is performed prior to the jackpot determination by the first special symbol success / failure determination means 704. As a result, the determination result by the second special symbol success / failure determination means 714 is the determination result by the first special symbol success / failure determination means 704. First, it is displayed on the second special symbol display 86 and the common symbol display area 115c. In particular, during the short-time game, since the lottery by the normal symbol lottery means 720 is a lottery advantageous to the player, the pair of movable pieces 396 are frequently opened and closed, and the game ball wins the third starting port 394. It becomes easy. However, when the winning of the game ball to the first starting port 390 and the winning of the game ball to the second starting port 392 or the third starting port 394 are performed almost simultaneously, the second special symbol success / failure determining means 714 By performing the jackpot determination by the first special symbol success / failure determination means 704 prior to the jackpot determination by the first special symbol winning / decision means 704, the game ball is won regardless of whether the game ball is won at the second starting port 392 or the third starting port 394. It is possible to avoid as much as possible the various data that have been discarded, and to suppress a decrease in interest.

  In the present embodiment, the CPU 602 executes a series of processes in steps S1104 to 1106 after executing a series of processes in steps S1101 to S1103. Instead, the CPU 602 executes steps S1104 to S1106. After executing the series of processes, the series of processes in steps S1101 to S1103 may be executed.

  In the present embodiment, the number of various data stored in the special symbol random number storage area 6061 (that is, the sum of the counter value of the first special symbol hold counter 703 and the counter value of the second special symbol hold counter 713). Is referred to as “starting memory number”.

[Variation start processing]
Next, the fluctuation start process will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 32 is a flowchart illustrating an example of the variation start process.

  In the change start process (step S130) executed when the process selection flag is “0”, the CPU 602 first determines whether or not the start memory number is 0 (step S1301). If the starting storage number is not 0 (NO in step S1301), the special symbol random number storage area 6061 is shifted (step S1302). In this shift process, various data stored in the first storage area 6061a is stored in the processing area 6062, and various data stored in the nth storage area (2 ≦ n ≦ 8) n-1) A process of storing in a storage area (2 ≦ n ≦ 8). When various data are stored only in the first storage area 6061a (when the second storage area 6061b to the eighth storage area 6061h are free areas), the various data stored in the first storage area 6061a. Is stored in the processing area 6062 only. If the start memory is 0 in step S1301 (YES in step S1301), the process is terminated.

  After performing the shift process in step S1302, the CPU 602 determines whether or not the type stored in the special symbol type storage area of the processing area 6062 is the second special symbol type (step S1303). At this time, if it is the second special symbol type (YES in step S1303), the second special symbol flag is turned ON (step S1303) and the counter value of the second special symbol hold counter 713 is decremented by 1 ( Step S1305) and the process proceeds to Step S1308. If the type stored in the special symbol type storage area of the processing area 6062 determined in step S1303 is the first special symbol type (NO in step S1303), the first special symbol flag is turned on (step S1303). Along with S1306), the counter value of the first special symbol hold counter 703 is decremented by 1 (step S1307), and the process proceeds to step S1308.

  In step S1308, the CPU 602 determines whether or not the probability variation function is operating, that is, whether or not the probability variation game is being executed by the probability variation game execution means 740 (step S1308). If the probability variation function is in operation (YES in step S1308), the special symbol probability change time determination table 708 is selected (step S1309), and if the probability variation function is not activated (NO in step S1308), special The symbol normal hour determination table 706 is selected (step S1310). Then, the jackpot determination is performed with reference to the determination table selected in step S1309 or step S1310 and the random number for determination of success / failure stored in the processing area 6062 (step S1311).

  The jackpot determination in step S1311 is performed by the first special symbol determination unit 704 if the first special symbol flag is ON, and the second special symbol determination unit if the second special symbol flag is ON. 714.

  If the CPU 602 determines that the jackpot is determined to be a big hit in step S1311 (YES in step S1311), the jackpot flag is turned ON (step S1311), and then it is determined whether or not the jackpot is long (step S1313). ). Specifically, it is determined by referring to the determination table selected in step S1309 or step S1310 and the random number for determination of success or failure whether or not the result of the jackpot determination is long hit. If it is determined that it is a long hit (YES in step S1313), the long hit flag is turned ON (step S1314), then the processing flag is updated to “1” (step S1318), and the process is terminated. If it is determined in step S1313 that it is not long hit (NO in step S1313), the short hit flag is turned ON (step S1315), and then the processing flag is updated to “1” (step S1318). finish. If it is determined that the big hit determination in step S1311 is not a big hit (NO in step S1311), the small hit determination is performed based on Table 1 (step S1316). If it is determined that the small hit is determined in the small hit determination (YES in step S1316), the small hit flag is turned on (step S1317), the process proceeds to step S1318, the processing flag is updated to “1”, and the process is terminated. . If it is determined that the small hit is not a small hit (NO in step S1316), the process proceeds to step S1318, the processing flag is updated to “1”, and the process ends.

  In the present embodiment, after the special symbol random number storage area 6061 is shifted in step S1302, the determination table selected in step S1310 (the special symbol normal hour determination table 706 or the special symbol probability variation determination per unit time). The jackpot determination is performed with reference to the determination table 708) and the random number for determination of success / failure stored in the processing area 6062 (step S1311), but is not limited thereto. For example, the jackpot determination is performed with reference to the determination table (special symbol normal time determination table 706 or special symbol probability change time determination table 708) and the random number for determination of success / failure stored in the first storage area 6061a, Thereafter, the special symbol random number storage area 6061 may be shifted. At this time, the validity determination random number stored in the first storage area 6061a can be referred to only when the change starts.

  Details of the jackpot determination and the small hit determination are as described above with reference to Table 1 and Table 2.

[Variation pattern setting process]
Next, the variation pattern setting process will be described with reference to FIGS. FIG. 33 is a flowchart illustrating an example of the variation pattern setting process. FIG. 34 is a flowchart showing an example of the hour variation pattern table setting process per first special symbol length. FIG. 35 is a list showing the variation patterns selected in the first special symbol length per hour pattern table setting process. FIG. 36 is a flowchart showing an example of the time variation pattern table setting process per second special symbol length. FIG. 37 is a table showing the variation patterns selected in the second special symbol length per-hour variation pattern table setting process. FIG. 38 is a flowchart illustrating an example of the short hit hour variation pattern table setting process. FIG. 39 is a flowchart illustrating an example of the small hit hour variation pattern table setting process. FIG. 40 is a table showing the variation patterns selected in the short hit hour variation pattern table setting process and the small hit hour variation pattern table setting process. FIG. 41 is a flowchart showing an example of the first special symbol deviation variation pattern table setting process. FIG. 42 is a flowchart continuing from A of FIG. FIG. 43 is a list chart showing variation patterns selected when it is determined that the reach is determined in the first special symbol deviation variation pattern table setting process. FIG. 44 is a flowchart showing an example of the second special symbol deviation variation pattern table setting process. FIG. 45 is a flowchart continued from C in FIG. FIG. 46 is a list chart showing variation patterns selected when reach is determined in the second special symbol deviation variation pattern table setting process. FIG. 47 is a list chart showing variation patterns selected when reach is not determined in the first special symbol loss variation pattern table setting process and the second special symbol loss variation pattern table setting processing.

  In the tables shown in FIGS. 35, 37, 40, 43, 46, and 47, a command, a lottery result, a variation time, a variation name (variation content), and the variation number are associated with the variation number. The probability that the variation content of is selected is stored. The “variation content” is the content of the effect displayed on the effect display device 115 and the sound effect or music output from the speakers 18 and 57 in correspondence with the effect content.

  In the variation pattern setting process of FIG. 33, first, it is determined whether or not the jackpot flag is ON (step S1510). That is, it is determined whether or not the jackpot is derived based on the variation of the special symbol this time. If it is determined that the big hit flag is ON (YES in step S1510), it is next determined whether or not the long hit flag is ON (step S1520). That is, it is determined whether or not the jackpot determined in step S1510 is a long hit. If it is determined that the long winning flag is ON (YES in step S1520), it is then determined whether or not the first special symbol flag is ON (step S1530). That is, it is determined whether or not the current variation is based on a winning / not-determining random number extracted based on the detection of the game ball by the first start port sensor 644. If it is determined that the first special symbol flag is ON (YES in step S1530), a first special symbol length per hour variation pattern table setting process (step S1540) is performed. In the first special symbol length per hour variation pattern table setting process (step S1540), it is determined whether or not the time reduction function is being operated (that is, whether or not the time reduction game is being executed by the time reduction game execution means 742), and the probability variation function. Depending on whether it is in operation (that is, whether or not a probability variation game is being executed by the probability variation game execution means 740) and whether or not it is a length per symbol variation symbol, the first special symbol length per Select the time variation pattern table.

  If it is determined that the first special symbol flag is not ON (NO in step S1530), the second special symbol length per hour variation pattern table setting process (step S1550) is performed. In the second special symbol length per hour variation pattern table setting process (step S1550), whether or not the time reduction function is operating, whether or not the probability variation function is operating, and whether or not the probability variation per length Depending on whether or not, the variation pattern table at the time of the second special symbol length is selected.

  If it is determined in step S1520 that the long hit flag is not ON (ie, short hit) (NO in step S1520), short hit variation pattern table setting processing (step S1560) is performed. In the short hit hour variation pattern table setting process, it is determined whether or not the short time function is operating and whether the probability variation function is in operation, and the short hit time variation pattern table is selected according to each gaming state. To do.

  If it is determined in step S1520 that there is no long hit (that is, a short hit), it is not determined whether or not the current variation is based on the detection of the game ball by the first start port sensor 644. Accordingly, when a short win occurs in response to the winning of the game ball at the first starting port 390, and in response to the winning of the game ball in the second starting port 392 or the third starting port 394, the short hit is generated. In any case, the same variation pattern table is selected.

  If it is determined in step S1510 that the big hit flag is not ON (NO in step S1510), it is determined whether or not the small hit flag is ON (step S1570). If it is determined that the small hit flag is ON (YES in step S1570), a small hit hour variation pattern table setting process (step S1580) is performed. In the small hit hour variation pattern setting process, it is determined whether or not the short time function is in operation and whether or not the probability variation function is in operation, and a variation pattern table at the small hit time corresponding to each gaming state is selected. .

  Note that if it is determined in step S1570 that it is a small hit, similarly to the case where it is determined that it is not a long hit in step S1520, the current variation is based on the detection of the game ball by the first start port sensor 644. It is not judged whether it is a thing. Accordingly, when a small hit is generated in response to the winning of the game ball in the first starting port 390, and in response to the winning of the game ball in the second starting port 392 or the third starting port 394, the small hit is made. In any case, the same variation pattern table is selected.

  If it is determined that the small hit flag is not ON (NO in step S1570), it is determined whether or not the first special symbol flag is ON (step S1590). If it is determined that the first special symbol flag is ON (YES in step S1590), the first special symbol outlier variation pattern table setting process (step S1600) is performed. In the first special symbol out-of-fluctuation variation pattern table setting process, first, it is determined whether or not the short-time function is activated and whether or not the probability variation function is activated, and then whether or not reach variation is performed is determined by lottery ( Hereinafter, this lottery is referred to as “reach lottery”. In the reach lottery, a reach determination random number is acquired, the acquired reach determination random number is stored in the RAM 606, and the determination value set in a predetermined reach determination table matches the acquired reach determination random number. It is determined whether or not reach variation is performed. Then, it is determined whether or not the short time function is activated, whether the probability variation function is activated, whether or not reach variation is performed, and the counter value by the first special symbol hold counter 703 (see FIG. 23). Based on this, the variation pattern table at the time of the first special symbol deviation is selected.

  If it is determined in step S1590 that the first special symbol flag is not ON (NO in step S1590), the second special symbol out-of-shift pattern table setting process (step S1610) is performed. In the second special symbol deviation variation pattern table setting process, it is determined whether or not the time-shortening function is operating and whether or not the probability variation function is operating. When the time reduction function is not activated, the reach variation pattern table in which the reach variation is always performed is selected. If the operation is short-time, the reach determination random number is acquired and stored in the RAM 606, and the acquired reach determination random number is matched with a determination value set in a predetermined reach determination table. Then, it is determined whether or not reach fluctuation is to be made. Then, it is determined whether or not the short-time function is activated, whether or not the probability variation function is activated, whether or not reach variation is performed, the counter value by the second special symbol hold counter 713 (see FIG. 23), Accordingly, the variation pattern table at the time of the second special symbol deviation is selected.

  When each variation pattern table is set, the process advances to step S1620 to determine the variation pattern. In determining the variation pattern, first, a variation display random number is acquired. Based on the obtained variation display random number, any one of the variation patterns set in the variation pattern table set in step S1540, step S1550, step S1560, step S1580, step S1600 or step S1610 is selected. A variation pattern is determined (step S1620).

  Each variation pattern is set with a variation time and a command. When the variation pattern is determined (step S1620), the determined variation pattern is set as a selection value (step S1630). Then, a command corresponding to the variation pattern set as the selection value is set as an effect command transmitted to the peripheral control board 662. When the variation pattern is set as a selection value (step S1630), the variation time corresponding to the set variation pattern is set in the timer (step S1640). That is, the variation time of the special symbol is set in a timer provided in the RAM 606 mounted on the main control board 131. Thereafter, the processing flag is updated to “2” (step S1650), and the variation pattern setting process is terminated.

  Next, the first special symbol length per hour variation pattern table setting process will be described based on FIG. 34 and FIG. In the first special symbol length per hour variation pattern table setting process of FIG. 34, the CPU 602 first determines whether or not the time-shortening function is inactive, that is, whether or not the time-shortening game is executed by the time-shortening game execution means 742. Is determined (step S 15401). If it is determined that the time reduction function is not activated (YES in step S 15401), a variation pattern table corresponding to the type of symbol per long when the time reduction function is not activated is selected (step S 15402). Specifically, it uses a random number to determine whether the type of symbol per length is a symbol per short length with probability change or a symbol per regular length. Table 1 is selected, and if the symbol is a normal length, table 2 is selected (see FIG. 35).

  If it is determined in step S 15401 that the time-saving function is not inactive, that is, it is in the time-saving gaming state (NO in step S 15401), whether or not the probability variation function is inactive, that is, the probability-changing game is executed by the probability-changing game executing means 740. It is determined whether it has been performed (step S15403). If it is determined that the probability variation function has not been activated (YES in step S15403), a variation pattern table corresponding to the type per long when the short-time function is activated and when the probability is low is selected (step S15404). Specifically, it uses a random number to determine whether the type of symbol per length is a symbol per short-length with probability variation or a symbol per regular length. Select table 3 and select table 4 if the symbol per normal length.

  If it is determined in step S15403 that the probability variation function is not inoperative, that is, the probability variation gaming state (NO in step S15403), the variation pattern table corresponding to the type per long when the time-short function is activated and at high probability is selected. (Step S15405). Specifically, it uses a random number to determine whether the type of symbol per length is a symbol per short-length with probability variation or a symbol per regular length. Select the table 5 and select the table 6 when the symbol per normal length.

  When each variation pattern table is selected in step S15402, step S15404, and step S15405, the first special symbol length per variation pattern table setting process is terminated.

  When table 1 is selected in the first special symbol length per hour variation pattern table setting process, a variation pattern random number is obtained, and based on the obtained variation pattern random number, the variation number 13 per normal length of variation number 10 is obtained. Per planet reach A normal length, per planet reach A long length of change number 15, per planet reach B of change number 17 (via planet reach A), per reach of planet reach C (via planet reach A) of change number 19, Change per Planet Reach D (changed through Planet Reach A) with a change number of 21, per first reach of Planet Reach B with a change number of 26, per second reach of Planet Reach B with a change number of 28, and per first half of planet reach of a change number 33 Per second half of Planet Reach C with number 35, per second half of Planet Reach D with variation number 40, second half of Planet Reach D with variation number 42 Among the hits and chances of fluctuation number 45 (per probability variation length), any one of the fluctuation patterns is 500/64000, 3500/64000, 5000/64000, 8000/64000, and 64000 / minute, respectively. 10000, 10000/64000, 4000/4000, 4000/64000, 4000/64000, 4000/4000, 4000/64000, 4000/64000, and 3000/64000. Then, a command corresponding to the selected variation pattern is set as an effect command, and a variation time corresponding to the selected variation pattern is set in the timer. For example, when the normal pattern is selected with a probability of 500/60004 as the variation pattern, the command 0AH corresponding to the variation pattern per normal length is set as the effect command, and 21500 ms is set as the variation time value in the timer. When the normal length per unit is selected, reach variation is executed after the start of variation of the decorative symbol displayed on the effect display device 115 (see FIG. 10), and then the stop symbol is long-performed without executing the super reach effect. Display to be an aspect. Similarly, other variation patterns are selected with respective probabilities, a command corresponding to the selected variation pattern is used as an effect command, and a variation time value corresponding to the selected variation pattern is set in the timer.

  When table 2 is selected in the first special symbol length per hour variation pattern table setting process, the same variation pattern as table 1 is selected with the same probability. However, the probability that the variation numbers 26, 28, 33, 35, 40, and 42 are selected is 4000/64000 in the table 1 and 4500/64000 in the table 2. The probability that the variation number 45 is selected is 3000/64000 in the table 1, but not selected in the table 2. Then, similarly to the case where the table 1 is selected, a command corresponding to the selected variation pattern is set, and a variation time corresponding to the selected variation pattern is set in the timer.

  When table 3 is selected in the first special symbol length per hour variation pattern table setting process, a variation pattern random number is acquired, and based on the acquired variation pattern random number, variation per planetary reach B first half length of variation number 26 Per planetary reach B of the number 28, per first half length of the planet reach C of the variation number 33, per second half length of the planet reach C of the variation number 35, per planetary reach D of the variation number 40, and the planet of the variation number 42 One of the fluctuation patterns per second half of reach D has a probability of 10500/64000, 10500/64000, 10500/64000, 10500/64000, 11000/64000, and 11000/64000, respectively. Select with. Then, a command corresponding to the selected variation pattern is set as an effect command, and a variation time corresponding to the selected variation pattern is set in the timer. For example, when planetary reach B first half length is selected as a variation pattern with a probability of 10500 of 64000, command 1AH corresponding to the variation pattern per planetary reach B first half length is set as an effect command and variation time value is 41100 ms. To the timer. When this perimeter of the first reach of planetary reach B is selected, the reach variation is executed after the start of the variation of the decorative symbol displayed on the effect display device 115 (see FIG. 10), and the character (alien) is set against the planetary pattern (B) in the background. ) Performs a super-reach effect in a manner of performing dance, and then displays the stop symbol in a long-hit manner.

  When the table 4 is selected in the first special symbol length per hour variation pattern table setting process, the same variation pattern as the table 3 is selected with the same probability. As in the case where the table 3 is selected, a command corresponding to the selected variation pattern is set as an effect command, and a variation time corresponding to the selected variation pattern is set in the timer.

  When table 5 is selected in the first special symbol length per hour variation pattern table setting process, a variation pattern random number is acquired, and based on the acquired variation pattern random number, planet reach B of the variation number 51 per completion (common) Per change number 52, planet reach B door first resurrection length, per change number 53 planet reach B door second resurrection length, per change number 54 planet reach B door third resurrection length, per change number 60 Per Planet Reach C completion (probable change), per Planet Reach C Door with Resurrection Number 61, per Resurrection Length, per Reach Length with Planet Reach C Door with Fluctuation Number 62, and Planet Reach C Door 3 with Variation Number 63 Per planetary reach D with a change number of 69 (peripheral change) per planet resurrection length, first with a reach number 70 of planet reach D with a change number 70 Second reach of planet reach D with a change number of 71 per resurrection length One of the variation patterns per active length and per third revival length of Planet Reach D door with variable number 72 is 30000/60000, 500/4000/000, 500/6000/4000, and 64000 / min, respectively. Select with a probability of 1000, 10,000 in 64000, 250 in 64000, 250 in 64000, 5500 in 64000, 10,000 in 64000, 250 in 64000, 250 in 64000, and 5500 in 64000. Then, a command corresponding to the selected variation pattern is set as an effect command, and a variation time corresponding to the selected variation pattern is set in the timer. For example, when planetary reach B complete run length is selected with a probability of 30000/60000 as a variation pattern, command 33H corresponding to the variation pattern per planet reach B complete run length is set as a production command, and the variation time value is 55000 ms. Is set to the timer. Similarly, other variation patterns are selected with their respective probabilities, a command corresponding to the selected variation pattern is set as an effect command, and a variation time value corresponding to the selected variation pattern is set in the timer.

  When the table 6 is selected in the first special symbol length per hour variation pattern table setting process, the variation pattern per planet reach B completion of the variation number 51 is always selected without obtaining the variation pattern random number. Then, the command 33H corresponding to the fluctuation pattern per planet reach B completion length is set as an effect command, and 55000 ms is set as a fluctuation time value in the timer. For the completion of Planet Reach B, the super-reach in which the character (alien) dances with the planet pattern (B) after the decoration pattern displayed on the effect display device 115 (see FIG. 10) starts to fluctuate. After that, the door closes from the left and right to cover the character (alien), but the dance by the character (alien) is repeated three times, and the dance by the character (alien) ends. After that, the stop symbol is displayed in a long-hit manner.

  Thus, the content of the variation pattern when the table 6 is selected is different from the content of the variation pattern when the table 5 is selected. That is, per Planet Reach B Door 1 Resurrection Length, Planet Reach B Door 2 Resurrection Length, Planet Reach B Door 3 Resurrection Length Per Planet Reach C Completion , Planet Reach C Door 1st Resurrection Length, Planet Reach C Door 2nd Resurrection Length, Planet Reach C Door 3rd Resurrection Length, Planet Reach D Complete Run, Planet Reach D Door 1 Resurrection Length Neither the planet reach D door second resurrection length nor the planet reach D door third resurrection length is selected on the table 6, so these variation patterns are displayed on the effect display device 115. If this is done, the per unit length of probability change is fixed.

  Next, the second special symbol length per hour variation pattern table setting process will be described based on FIG. 36 and FIG. In the second special symbol length per hour variation pattern table setting process of FIG. 36, the CPU 602 first determines whether or not the time-shortening function is inactive, that is, whether or not the time-shortage game is being executed by the time-shortening game execution means 742. Is determined (step S15501). If it is determined that the time-shortening function is not activated (YES in step S15501), a variation pattern table corresponding to the type of symbol per long when the time-shortening function is not activated is selected (step S15502). Specifically, it uses a random number to determine whether the type of symbol per length is a symbol per short length with probability change or a symbol per regular length. When the table 7 is selected and the symbol per normal length is selected, the table 8 is selected (see FIG. 37).

  If it is determined in step S15501 that the time-saving function is not inactive, that is, it is in the time-saving gaming state (NO in step S15501), whether or not the probability variation function is inactive, that is, the probability-changing game is executed by the probability-changing game executing means 740. It is determined whether it has been performed (step S15503). If it is determined that the probability variation function is not activated (YES in step S15503), the variation pattern table corresponding to the type per long when the short-time function is activated and when the probability is low is selected (step S15504). Specifically, it uses a random number to determine whether the type of symbol per length is a symbol per short length with probability change or a symbol per regular length. Select the table 9 and select the table 10 when the symbol per normal length.

  If it is determined in step S15503 that the probability variation function is not inactive, that is, the probability variation gaming state is selected (NO in step S15503), the variation pattern table corresponding to the type per length at the time of the short-time function activation and at the high probability is selected. (Step S15505). Specifically, it uses a random number to determine whether the type of symbol per length is a symbol per short length with probability change or a symbol per regular length. Select the table 11 and select the table 12 if the symbol is a pattern per normal length.

  When each variation pattern table is selected in step S15502, step S15504, and step S15505, the second special symbol length per variation pattern table setting process is terminated.

  When the table 7 is selected in the second special symbol length per hour variation pattern table setting process, a variation pattern random number is obtained, and based on the obtained variation pattern random number, a variation number 78 per normal length of the variation number 75 is obtained. Per planet reach A normal length, per planet reach A long length of change number 80, per planet reach B of change number 82 (via planet reach A) length, per planet reach C of change number 84 (via planet reach A), One of the variation patterns among the length of planet reach D (via planet reach A) of variation number 86 is 900/64000, 3800/64000, 6000/64000, 12000/64000, 64000, respectively. Select with a probability of 20000 / minute and 21300/64000. Then, a command corresponding to the selected variation pattern is set as an effect command, and a variation time corresponding to the selected variation pattern is set in the timer. For example, when the normal pattern is selected with a probability of 900/60004 as the variation pattern, the command 51H corresponding to the variation pattern per normal length is set as the effect command, and the variation time value is set to 15400 ms in the timer. Similarly, other variation patterns are selected with their respective probabilities, a command corresponding to the selected variation pattern is set as an effect command, and a variation time value corresponding to the selected variation pattern is set in the timer.

  When the table 8 is selected in the second special symbol length per hour variation pattern table setting process, the same variation pattern as the table 7 is selected with the same probability. However, the probability that the variation number 82 is selected is 12000/14000 in the table 7, but 15000/64000 in the table 8. In addition, the probability that the variation number 86 is selected is 21300/64000 in the table 7, but 18300/64000 in the table 8. As in the case where the table 7 is selected, a command corresponding to the selected variation pattern is set, and a variation time corresponding to the selected variation pattern is set in the timer.

  When the table 9 is selected in the second special symbol length per hour variation pattern table setting process, a variation pattern random number is acquired, and based on the acquired variation pattern random number, the planet reach B of the variation number 51 per completion (common) Per change number 52, planet reach B door first resurrection length, per change number 53 planet reach B door second resurrection length, per change number 54 planet reach B door third resurrection length, per change number 60 Per Planet Reach C completion (probable change), per planet Reach C door with change number 61, per resurrection length, per second reach of planet reach C door with change number 62, third reach of planet reach C door with change number 63 Per reviving length, per planet reach D of change number 69 (probable change) per rebound length of planet reach D door of variation number 70 per second resurgence length of planet reach D door of variation number 71 , And the variation number 72 of the planet reach D door per 3rd resurrection length, the variation pattern is 26500/64000, 500/64000, 500/44000, 1000/64000, Select with probabilities of 15000/64000, 250/44000, 500/44000, 2000/64000, 15000/64000, 250/44000, 500/64000, and 2000/64000. Then, a command corresponding to the selected variation pattern is set, and a variation time corresponding to the selected variation pattern is set in the timer. For example, per planet reach B completion length is selected with a probability of 26500/64000, command 33H corresponding to the selected variation pattern per planet reach B completion length is set as a production command, and 55000 ms is set as a timer for the variation time value. Set to. Similarly, other variation patterns are selected with their respective probabilities, a command corresponding to the selected variation pattern is set as an effect command, and a variation time value corresponding to the selected variation pattern is set in the timer.

  When the table 11 is selected in the second special symbol length per hour variation pattern table setting process, a variation pattern random number is obtained, and based on the obtained variation pattern random number, the variation per planetary reach B first half length of the variation number 26 is obtained. Per planetary reach B of the number 28, per first half length of the planet reach C of the variation number 33, per second half length of the planet reach C of the variation number 35, per first half length of the planet reach D of the variation number 40, and the planet of the variation number 42 One of the fluctuation patterns per second half of reach D has a probability of 13750/64000, 13750/64000, 10,000 / 64000, 10,000 / 64000, 8250/64000, and 8250/64000, respectively. Select with. Then, a command corresponding to the selected variation pattern is set, and a variation time corresponding to the selected variation pattern is set in the timer. For example, when the per-plane reach B length is selected with a probability of 13750/64000 as the fluctuation pattern, the command 1AH corresponding to the fluctuation pattern per planet reach B length is set as the effect command, and 41100 ms is set as the fluctuation time value. Set to.

  When the table 10 is selected in the second special symbol length per hour variation pattern table setting process, the variation pattern per planet reach B completion length of variation number 51 is always selected without acquiring the variation pattern random number. Then, the command 33H corresponding to the variation pattern per planet reach B completion length is set as an effect command, and 55000 ms is set as a variation time value in the timer.

  Thus, the content of the variation pattern when the table 10 is selected is different from the content of the variation pattern when the table 9 is selected. In other words, per Planet Reach B Door 1 Resurrection Length, Table Reach B Door 2 Resurrection Length, Planet Reach B Door 3 Resurrection Length Per Planet Reach C Completion , Planet Reach C Door 1st Resurrection Length, Planet Reach C Door 2nd Resurrection Length, Planet Reach C Door 3rd Resurrection Length, Planet Reach D Complete Run, Planet Reach D Door 1 Resurrection Length Neither the planet reach D door second resurrection length nor the planet reach D door third resurrection length is selected on the table 10, so these variation patterns are displayed on the effect display device 115. If this is done, the per unit length of probability change is fixed.

  Next, the short hit hour variation pattern table setting process will be described with reference to FIGS. 38 and 39. FIG. In the short hit hour variation pattern table setting process of FIG. 38, the CPU 602 first determines whether or not the time-shortening function is not activated, that is, whether or not the time-shortening game is being executed by the time-shortening game execution means 742 ( Step S15601). If it is determined that the time reduction function is not activated (YES in step S15601), a variation pattern table in the case where the time reduction function is not activated is selected (step S15602). That is, when the time-short game is not executed by the time-short game execution means 742, the table 13 is selected regardless of whether or not the probability change game is executed by the probability change game execution means 740 (see FIG. 40).

  If it is determined in step S15601 that the time-saving function is not inactive, that is, it is in the time-saving gaming state (NO in step S15601), whether or not the probability variation function is inactive, that is, the probability-changing game is executed by the probability-changing game executing means 740. It is determined whether or not the state is not performed (step S15603). If it is determined that the probability variation function is not activated (YES in step S15603), a variation pattern table is selected when the time reduction function is activated and the probability variation function is not activated (step S15604). That is, when the time-short game is being executed by the time-short game executing means 742 and the probability-changing game is not being executed by the probability-changing game executing means 740, the table 14 is selected (see FIG. 40).

  If it is determined in step S15601 that the time reduction function is not inactive (NO in step S15603), a variation pattern table at the time of the time reduction function activation and the probability variation function activation is selected (step S15605). That is, when the time-short game is executed by the time-short game execution means 742 and the probability change game is executed by the probability change game execution means 740, the table 15 is selected (see FIG. 40).

  When the table 13 is selected in the short hit hour variation pattern table setting process, the variation pattern with the chance of variation number 43 is selected with a probability of 100% (that is, always). Then, the command 2BH is set as an effect command, and 24600 ms is set as a variation time value in the timer. At the chance (short win), after the decorative symbols are variably displayed on the effect display device 115, the decorative symbols are stopped and displayed in a short hit manner different from the long win without the reach effect. As described above, in the normal gaming state in which the time-shortening function is not activated and the probability changing function is not activated, only one type of short win display mode of chance is stored in the display mode storage unit 830 (see FIG. 55) described later. Yes.

  When the table 14 is selected in the short hit hour variation pattern table setting process, a variation pattern random number is acquired, and based on the acquired variation pattern random number, the planet reach B of the variation number 23 is out of the intro, the planet reach of the variation number 30 One of the variation patterns is selected with a probability of 24000/64000, 20000/64000, and 20000/60000, out of C intro and planet reach D intro with variation number 37. Then, a command corresponding to the selected variation pattern is set as an effect command, and a variation time corresponding to the selected variation pattern is set in the timer. For example, when planetary reach B intro miss is selected with a probability of 24,000 / 64000, command 17H corresponding to the fluctuation pattern of planet reach B intro is set as a production command, and 25700 ms is set as a variation time value in a timer. . When this Planet Reach B Intro is selected, the decorative pattern is displayed in a variable manner on the effect display device 115, and then the planet pattern (B) is displayed with the reach effect, but before the character (alien) starts dancing, The decorative design is stopped and displayed in a short hit mode different from the long hit. Similarly, the variation pattern of the out of the planet reach C and the out of the planet reach D is also selected with a probability of 20000 of 64000, and the commands 1EH and 25H of the selected variation pattern are set as the production command and the variation time value is set. Set 24100 ms in the timer.

  When the table 15 is selected in the short hit hour variation pattern table setting process, a variation pattern random number is acquired, and based on the acquired variation pattern random number, the planet reach B door first variation number of the variation number 47, the variation number 48 planet reach B door per 3rd short, variation number 56 planet reach C 1st door short, variation number 57 planet reach C 3rd door short per variation, 65 planet reach D door 1 One of the variation patterns of the planet reach D and the third number of planet reach D doors with variation number 66 is 14000/64000, 4000/44000, 19000/64000, 4000/44000, respectively. , 19000/64000, and 4000/64000. Then, a command corresponding to the selected variation pattern is set as an effect command, and a variation time corresponding to the selected variation pattern is set in the timer. For example, when the planetary reach B door first short per 14,000 is selected with a probability of 14000/64000, the command 2FH corresponding to the fluctuation pattern per planetary reach B door first short is set as a production command and the fluctuation time A value of 21800 ms is set in the timer. When this planet reach B door first short hit is selected, the decorative display is variably displayed on the effect display device 115, and then the planet pattern (B) is displayed and the character (alien) performs a super reach in a manner of dancing. After that, the door is closed from the left and right so as to cover the character (alien), and the decorative symbols are stopped and displayed in a short hit manner different from the long hit. Similarly, other variation patterns are selected with respective probabilities, and a command corresponding to the selected variation pattern is set as an effect command, and a corresponding variation time value is set in the timer.

  Next, the small hitting variation pattern table setting process will be described with reference to FIGS. 39 and 40. FIG. In the small hitting time variation pattern table setting process of FIG. 39, the CPU 602 first determines whether or not the time-shortening function is not activated, that is, whether or not the time-shortening game is being executed by the time-shortening game execution means 742 ( Step S15801). If it is determined that the time reduction function is not activated (YES in step S15801), a variation pattern table in the case where the time reduction function is not activated is selected (step S15802). That is, when the time-short game is not executed by the time-short game execution means 742, the table 16 is selected regardless of whether or not the probability change game is executed by the probability change game execution means 740 (see FIG. 40).

  If it is determined in step S15801 that the time reduction function is not inactive (NO in step S15801), whether or not the probability variation function is inactive, that is, whether or not the probability variation game is not executed by the probability variation game execution means 740. Is determined (step S15803). If it is determined that the probability variation function is not activated (YES in step S15803), a variation pattern table is selected when the time reduction function is activated and the probability variation function is not activated (step S15804). That is, when the time-short game is executed by the time-short game execution means 742 and the probability change game is not executed by the probability change game execution means 740, the table 17 is selected (see FIG. 40).

  If it is determined in step S15801 that the time-shortening function is not activated (NO in step S15803), a variation pattern table at the time-shortening function activation and probability variation function activation is selected (step S15805). That is, when the time-short game is executed by the time-short game execution means 742 and the probability change game is executed by the probability change game execution means 740, the table 18 is selected (see FIG. 40).

  When the table 16 is selected in the small hit hour variation pattern table setting process, the variation pattern having the chance of variation number 44 is selected with a probability of 100% (that is, always). Then, command 2CH is set as an effect command, and 24600 ms is set as a variable time value in the timer. In this embodiment, the variation pattern of the chance number of the variation number 44 is the same as the variation pattern of the chance number of the variation number 43. As described above, in the normal gaming state in which the time-shortening function is not activated and the probability changing function is not activated, only one kind of small hit display mode is stored in the display mode storage unit 830 (see FIG. 55) described later. Yes.

  When the table 17 is selected in the small hit hour variation pattern table setting process, a variation pattern random number is acquired, and based on the acquired variation pattern random number, the planet reach B intro with the variation number 24 is deviated and the planet reach with the variation number 31 is obtained. One of the variation patterns is selected with a probability of 40000/64000, 12000/64000, and 12000/64000, respectively, out of the C intro and the planet reach D intro with variation number 38. Then, a command corresponding to the selected variation pattern is set as an effect command, and a variation time corresponding to the selected variation pattern is set in the timer. For example, when planetary reach B intro miss is selected with a probability of 40000/60000, command 18H corresponding to the selected variation pattern of planet reach B intro is set as an effect command, and 25700 ms is set as a timer for the variation time value. set. In the present embodiment, the planet reach B intro with the variation number 24, the planet reach C intro with the variation number 31, and the planet reach D intro with the variation number 38 are respectively out of the planet reach B intro with the variation number 23. The variation pattern is the same as the variation pattern of the out-of-plane, the reach of Planet Reach C intro of change number 30 and the out of Planet Reach D intro of change number 37.

  When the table 18 is selected in the short hit fluctuation pattern table setting process, a fluctuation pattern random number is acquired, and based on the acquired fluctuation pattern random number, the planet reach B door 1st small hit of the fluctuation number 49, the fluctuation number 50 planet reach B doors per small, change number 58 planet reach C door 1 per hit, change number 59 planet reach C door 2 hits per change, number 67 planet reach D door 1 One of the variation patterns of the small hit and the planetary reach D door of the variation number 68 second small hit, respectively, 17000/64000, 14500/64000, 5000/64000, 11250/64000, Select with a probability of 5000/64000 and 11250/64000. Then, a command corresponding to the selected variation pattern is set as an effect command, and a variation time corresponding to the selected variation pattern is set in the timer. For example, when planetary reach B door first small hit is selected with a probability of 17000 of 64000, command 31H corresponding to the fluctuation pattern per planet reach B door first small is set as a production command and the fluctuation time A value of 21800 ms is set in the timer. In addition, in this embodiment, the planet reach B door of the variation number 49 is small per hit, the planet reach B door of the variation number 50 is small per hit, the planet reach C door of the variation number 58 is small per variation, the variation number The variation patterns of the 59th planet reach C door per second small size, the variation number 67 planet reach D door first per small size, and the variation number 68 planet reach D second door per small size are the variation numbers, respectively. 47 planet reach B doors per 1 short, change number 48 planet reach B door 3 shorts, change number 56 planet reach C door 1 short contact, change number 57 planet reach C 3 doors short The variation pattern is the same as the variation pattern of the planet reach D door of the variation number 65, and the variation of the planet reach D door of the variation number 66.

  Next, the first special symbol deviation variation pattern table setting process will be described with reference to FIGS. 41, 42, 43 and 47. In the first special out-of-symbol variation pattern table setting process of FIGS. 41 and 42, first, the CPU 602 determines whether or not the time-shortening function is inactive, that is, whether the time-shortening game is executed by the time-shortening game execution means 742. It is determined whether or not (step S16001). If it is determined that the time reduction function is not activated (YES in step S 16001), then the number of first special symbols held immediately after the start of fluctuation (that is, the counter value by the first special symbol holding counter 703 (see FIG. 23)) is obtained. It is determined whether it is 0 (step S 16002). If it is determined that the number of reserved first symbol symbols is zero (YES in step S 16002), it is determined whether or not reach variation is to be executed (step S 16003). Specifically, one reach random number is acquired from the reach random numbers from 0 to 240, and the acquired reach random number corresponds to a predetermined reach determination value (from 0 to 25 in the present embodiment). A so-called reach lottery is performed to determine whether or not. If winning is determined in the reach lottery, it is determined that the reach change is executed (YES in step S16003), and the table 19 (see FIG. 43) is selected (step S16004).

  Note that “the number of reserved first special symbols” means the number of reserved lotteries by the first special symbol lottery means 700 in the present embodiment. That is, in this embodiment, although the random number for determination of success / failure is acquired by the random number extraction means for determination of first special symbol 702, the determination of success / failure by the first special symbol determination / rejection determination means 704 is suspended. The number of holdings for determination of success / failure by the determination unit 704 corresponds to the number of reservations for the first special symbol. Instead of this, when a game ball wins the first starting port 390, the acquisition of the random number for success / failure determination by the random number extracting means for determination 702 for the first special symbol may be suspended. In this case, the number of suspensions of acquisition of random numbers for success / failure determination by the random number extraction means for determination per first special symbol 702 corresponds to the number of suspensions of the first special symbol. Further, when the game ball wins the first start opening 390, the random number for determination of success / failure is acquired by the random number extraction means for determination of first special symbol 702, and the random number for determination of success / failure acquired by the first special symbol determination of success / failure determination means 704 is obtained. However, it may be suspended to display the determination result on the first special symbol display 84. In this case, the number of suspensions of display on the first special symbol display 84 of the determination result by the first special symbol success / failure determination means 704 corresponds to the number of suspensions of the first special symbol.

  When it is determined in step S16003 that the reach variation is not executed, that is, if the reach lottery is not won (NO in step S16003), the table 25 (see FIG. 47) is selected (step S16005).

  If it is determined in step S 16002 that the number of reserved first symbol symbols is not zero (NO in step S 16002), it is determined whether the number of reserved first symbol symbols immediately after the start of fluctuation is 1 (step S 16006). . Here, if it is determined that the number of holds of the first special symbol is 1 (YES in step S16006), it is determined whether or not reach variation is executed, as in the case where the number of holds of the first special symbol is 1. (Step S16007). If winning is determined in the reach lottery, it is determined that the reach change is executed (YES in step S16007), and the table 19 (see FIG. 43) is selected (step S16008). However, since the reach determination value when the number of holds of the first special symbol is 1 is from 0 to 23, in the reach lottery as compared with the case where the number of hold of the first special symbol is 0 (reach determination value is 0 to 25) The winning probability is low.

  When it is determined in step S16007 that the reach variation is not executed, that is, if the reach lottery is not won (NO in step S16007), the table 25 (see FIG. 47) is selected (step S16009).

  If it is determined in step S16006 that the number of retained first special symbols is not 1 (NO in step S16006), it is determined whether the number of retained first special symbols immediately after the start of fluctuation is 2 (step S16010). . Here, if it is determined that the number of holds of the first special symbol is 2 (YES in step S16010), whether or not the reach variation is executed is determined as in the case where the number of holds of the first special symbol is 0 and 1. Judgment is made (step S16011). If winning is determined in the reach lottery, it is determined that the reach change is executed (YES in step S16011), and the table 19 (see FIG. 43) is selected (step S16012). However, since the reach determination value is 0 to 21 when the number of holdings of the first special symbol is 2, the winning probability in the reach lottery is lower than when the number of holdings of the first special symbol is 0 and 1.

  When it is determined in step S16011 that the reach variation is not executed, that is, if the reach lottery is not won (NO in step S16011), the table 26 (see FIG. 47) is selected (step S16013).

  If it is determined in step S16010 that the number of first special symbol hold is not 2 (NO in step S16014), it is determined that the number of first special symbol hold immediately after the start of fluctuation is 3, and the first special symbol hold is determined. As in the case where the numbers are 0, 1, and 2, it is determined whether or not reach variation is executed (step S16014). If winning is determined in the reach lottery, it is determined that the reach variation is executed (YES in step S16014), and the table 19 (see FIG. 43) is selected (step S16015). However, since the reach determination value is 0 to 15 when the number of holds of the first special symbol is 3, the winning probability in the reach lottery is lower than when the number of holds of the first special symbol is 0, 1, and 2.

  When it is determined in step S16014 that the reach variation is not executed, that is, if the reach lottery is not won (NO in step S16014), the table 27 (see FIG. 47) is selected (step S16013).

  In this way, when the time-shortening function is not activated, the reach lottery between the number of the first special symbol hold and the winning probability in the reach lottery is more likely to win the reach lottery as the number of the first special symbol hold is smaller. There is a correlation that the more the number of reserved special symbols is, the more difficult it is to win a reach lottery. As a result, when the reach variation is executed when the number of reserved first symbol symbols is 3, for example, the expectation of winning per long hit, short hit or small win increases, so it is possible to suppress a decrease in interest .

  If it is determined in step S 16001 that the time saving function is not inactive, that is, the time saving gaming state is set (NO in step S 16001), the processing shown in FIG. 42 is performed. Specifically, first, it is determined whether or not the probability variation function is not activated, that is, whether or not the probability variation game by the probability variation game execution means 740 is not being executed (step S16017). If it is determined that the probability variation function is not activated (YES in step S16017), it is determined whether or not reach variation is performed (step S16018). The determination as to whether or not to execute the reach variation is performed in the same way as the determination of whether or not to execute the reach variation when the time reduction function is not activated (step S16003, step S16007, step S16011, step S16014). Depending on the result. If winning is determined in the reach lottery, it is determined that the reach change is executed (YES in step S16018), and the table 20 (see FIG. 43) is selected (step S16019).

  When it is determined in step S16018 that the reach variation is not executed, that is, if the reach lottery is not won (NO in step S16018), the table 28 (see FIG. 47) is selected (step S16020).

  If it is determined in step S16017 that the probability variation function is not inactive, that is, the probability variation gaming state (NO in step S16017), it is determined whether or not the reach variation is to be executed as in the case where the time reduction function is not activated. (Step S16021). If the reach lottery is won, it is determined that the reach variation is executed (YES in step S16021), and the table 21 (see FIG. 43) is selected (step S16022). However, when the time reduction function is activated and the probability variation mechanism is not activated, that is, when the time variation function is not the probability variation gaming state, the reach judgment value is only 0 and 1. Therefore, the reach variation is smaller than when the time reduction function is not activated. The probability of being executed is very low. As a result, when the reach variation is executed when the short-time function is activated and the probability variation mechanism is not activated, the expectation of winning the long hit, short hit or small hit increases, and the decrease in interest can be suppressed.

  When it is determined in step S16021 that the reach variation is not executed, that is, if the reach lottery is not won (NO in step S16021), the table 29 (see FIG. 47) is selected (step S16023).

  When each variation pattern table is selected in step S16004, step S16005, step S16008, step S16009, step S16012, step S16013, step S16015, step S16016, step S16019, step S16020, step S16022, and step S16023, the first special symbol is lost. The time variation pattern table setting process is terminated.

  When the table 19 (see FIG. 43) is selected in the first special symbol deviation variation pattern table setting process, a variation pattern random number is acquired, and based on this acquired variation pattern random number, the variation number 8 is out of normal (1 Pre-pattern), normal deviation of change number 9 (after 1 pattern), planet reach A of change number 11 (before encore), planet reach A of change number 12 (after encore), planet reach A long of change number 14 Off, Planet Reach B with change number 16 (via Planet Reach A), Planet Reach C with change number 18 (via Planet Reach A), Planet reach D with change number 20 (via Planet Reach A), Change number 22 Planet Reach B out of the Intro, Planet Reach B out of the first half of Planet Reach B with the change number 25, Planet Reach B out of the second half of the planet Reach B of the change number 27, Planet Reach C of the change number 29 Out of the planet, reach out of the first half of the planet reach C of the change number 32, out of the second half of the reach of the planet reach of the change number 34, out of the planet reach D of the change number 36, out of the first half of the planet reach D of the change number 39, and the planet of the change number 41 One of the fluctuation patterns in the second half of reach D is changed to 19000/4000, 14000/64000, 4000/4000, 4000/4000, 4000/4000, 4000/300, 64000/300, respectively. 300, 64000, 7000, 64000, 2100, 64000, 2100, 64000, 3000, 64000, 225, 64000, 225, 64000, 3000, 64000, 225, 64000, and 64000 minutes Select with a probability of 225 . Then, a command corresponding to the selected variation pattern is set as an effect command, and a variation time corresponding to the selected variation pattern is set in the timer. For example, when the normal deviation of the variation number 8 (one symbol before) is selected with a probability of 19000 of 64000, the command 08H corresponding to the variation pattern of the normal deviation (one symbol before) is set as an effect command and the variation time Set the timer to 15600 ms. When the variation pattern of this normal deviation (one symbol before) is selected, the reach variation is executed after the decorative symbol variation displayed on the effect display device 115 (see FIG. 10) is started, and then the long hit, short hit and small The decorative symbol is stopped and displayed with a symbol which is not a win, and is one symbol before the reach symbol (for example, symbol 6 when symbol 7 is reach). Similarly, other variation patterns are selected with their respective probabilities, a command corresponding to the selected variation pattern is set as an effect command, and a variation time value corresponding to the selected variation pattern is set in the timer.

  When the table 20 (see FIG. 43) is selected in the first special symbol variation pattern table setting process, a variation pattern random number is acquired, and the planet reach B intro of the variation number 22 is acquired based on the acquired variation pattern random number. Off, Planet Reach B with change number 25, out of the first half of Planet Reach B, Change number 27, out of the second half of Planet Reach B, Out of Planet Reach C with change number 29, Out of the first half of Planet Reach C with change number 32, Second half of Planet Reach C with change number 34 One of the fluctuation patterns, out of the planet reach D intro of the change number 36, out of the first half of the planet reach D of the change number 39, and out of the second half of the planet reach D of the change number 41, is 100/64000. 25000 / min, 25000/64000, 50/64000, 3450/64000, 6 000 of 50,64000 minutes of 3450,64000 minutes of minutes 3450, and, to select with a probability of 3450 of 64000 minutes. Then, a command corresponding to the selected variation pattern is set as an effect command, and a variation time corresponding to the selected variation pattern is set in the timer. For example, when planetary reach B intro miss is selected with a probability of 100/64000 as the variation pattern, command 16H corresponding to the variation pattern of planet reach B intro is set as an effect command, and 25700 ms is timerd as the variation time value. Set to. If this planet reach B intro is selected, the planet pattern (B) will be displayed with the reach effect after the decorative symbol displayed on the effect display device 115 (see FIG. 10) starts to change, but the character (alien) Before the dance is performed, the decorative symbols are stopped and displayed in a so-called unreachable manner, which is different from both the big hit and the small hit. Similarly, other variation patterns are selected with their respective probabilities, and the command of the selected variation pattern is set as an effect command, and the variation time value corresponding to the selected variation pattern is set in the timer.

  When the table 21 (see FIG. 43) is selected in the first special symbol variation pattern table setting process, a variation pattern random number is acquired, and the planet reach B door of variation number 46 is acquired based on the acquired variation pattern random number. One of the fluctuation patterns of the first release of the planet reach C door with the change number 55 and the change of the first release of the planet reach D door with the change number 64 is 40000 for 64,000 and 64,000 minutes for the change, respectively. Select with a probability of 12000 and 12000 of 14000. Then, a command corresponding to the selected variation pattern is set as an effect command, and a variation time corresponding to the selected variation pattern is set in the timer. For example, when the variation pattern of the first planet reach B door is selected with a probability of 40000/64000, the command 2EH corresponding to the variation pattern of the first displacement of the planet reach B door is set as an effect command and the variation A time value of 21800 ms is set in the timer. If the first planet reach B door is selected, the planet pattern (B) is displayed and the character (alien) dances after the decoration pattern displayed on the effect display device 115 (see FIG. 10) starts to change. Is displayed, and then the door is closed from the left and right so as to cover the character (alien), and the decorative design is different in the so-called reach-excluded mode in which long, short and small hits are different. Stop display. Similarly, the variation pattern of the first release of Planet Reach C door and the first release of Planet Reach D door is also selected with a probability of 12000/64000, and commands 37H and 40H of the selected variation pattern are set as production commands. At the same time, 18600 ms is set in the timer as the variation time value.

  In the first special symbol deviation variation pattern table setting process, when the table 25 (see FIG. 47) is selected, the variation pattern of the normal variation with the variation number 1 is always selected, and the table 26 (see FIG. 47) is selected. When the table 27 (see FIG. 47) is selected, the variation pattern of the shortened variation 2 with the variation number 3 is always selected and the table 28 (see FIG. 47) is always selected. Is selected, the variation pattern of the short shortening variation 2 of the variation number 7 is always selected, and when the table 29 (see FIG. 47) is selected, the variation pattern of the short shortening variation 1 of the variation number 5 is always selected.

  That is, in the first special symbol detachment variation pattern table setting process, if the time reduction function is not activated, the variation pattern according to the number of retained first special symbols (that is, the counter value by the first special symbol retention counter 703). Will be selected. Therefore, if the number of holds of the first special symbol immediately after the start of the change is 0 or 1, the normal change of the change number 1 is selected, the command 01H is set as an effect command, and the change time value is set to 11800 ms as a timer. set. When the first special symbol hold number immediately after the start of the change is 2, select the change pattern of the change 1 of the short change of the change number 2, set the command 02H as the production command, and set the change time value to 6000 ms as the timer set. If the number of retained first special symbols immediately after the start of the change is 3, select the change pattern of the shortened change 2 of the change number 3, set the command 03H as the production command, and set 2900ms as the change time value to the timer set. In the normal variation, the shortening variation 1 and the shortening variation 2, after the start of the variation of the decorative symbol displayed on the effect display device 115, the decorative symbol is different from the long hit, short hit and small hit without the reach effect. To stop display.

  In the first special symbol out-of-fluctuation variation pattern table setting process, if the operation is short-time, whether or not the probability variation function is activated regardless of the number of first special symbols held, that is, probability variation game execution means. According to 740, the variation pattern is selected according to whether or not the probability variation game is being executed. Accordingly, when the probability variation function is not activated, the time shortening variation 2 of the variation number 7 is selected, the command 07H is set as the effect command, and 2300 ms is set as the variation time value in the timer. When the probability variation function is in operation, the short shortening variation 1 of the variation number 5 is selected, the command 05H is set as an effect command, and 2200 ms is set as a variation time value in the timer.

  Next, the second special symbol deviation variation pattern table setting process will be described with reference to FIGS. 44, 45, 46 and 47. FIG. 44 and 45, in the second special symbol out-of-symbol variation pattern table setting process, the CPU 602 first determines whether or not the time-shortening function is inactive, that is, whether the time-shortening game is executed by the time-shortening game execution means 742. It is determined whether or not (step S16101). If it is determined that the time reduction function is not activated (YES in step S16101), the table 22 is selected (step S16102). Although details will be described later, since a deviation variation pattern without a reach effect is not set in the table 22, a reach effect is always performed when the table 22 is selected.

  If it is determined in step S16101 that the time-saving function is not inactive, that is, the time-saving game is being executed by the time-saving game execution means 742 (NO in step S16101), the processing shown in FIG. 45 is performed. Specifically, first, it is determined whether or not the probability variation function is not activated, that is, whether or not the probability variation game is being executed by the probability variation game execution means 740 (step S16103). If it is determined that the probability variation function is not activated (YES in step S16103), it is determined whether or not reach variation is executed (step S16104). Specifically, in the same manner as the reach lottery in the second special symbol out-of-fluctuation variation pattern table setting process, a reach random number from zero to 240 is acquired, and the acquired reach random number is a predetermined reach determination value (this embodiment) In the embodiment, reach lottery is performed to determine whether or not 0 and 1). If the reach lottery is won, it is determined that the reach variation is executed (YES in step S16104), and the table 23 (see FIG. 46) is selected (step S16105).

  When it is determined in step S16104 that the reach change is not performed, that is, when the reach lottery is not won (NO in step S16104), the number of second special symbols held immediately after the start of the change (ie, the second special symbol hold counter 713). It is determined whether or not the counter value (see FIG. 23) is 0 (step S16106). If it is determined that the second special symbol hold number immediately after the start of fluctuation is 0 (YES in step S16106), table 30 is selected (step S16107), and if the second special symbol hold number is not zero (step S16106) The table 31 is selected (NO in S16106) (step S16108).

  In the present embodiment, “the number of second special symbol reservations” means the number of lottery reservations by the second special symbol lottery means 710. That is, in this embodiment, although the random number for determination of success / failure is obtained by the random number extraction means for determination of second special symbol 712, the determination of success / failure by the second special symbol determination / rejection determination means 714 is suspended. The number of reservations for determination of success / failure by the determination unit 714 corresponds to the number of reservations for the second special symbol. Instead of this, the acquisition of random numbers for determination of success / failure by the second special symbol determination random number extracting means 712 may be suspended when a game ball wins the second starting port 392 or the third starting port 394. . In this case, the number of suspensions of acquisition of random numbers for success / failure determination by the second special symbol determination random number extraction means 712 corresponds to the number of suspensions of the second special symbol. Further, when a game ball wins the second start port 392 or the third start port 394, the second special symbol hit determination random number extracting means 712 acquires the pass / fail determination random number and the second special symbol pass / fail determination means 714 Although it is determined whether or not the obtained random number for determining whether or not is correct, displaying the determination result on the second special symbol display 86 may be suspended. In this case, the number of suspensions of display on the second special symbol display 86 of the determination result by the second special symbol determination unit 714 corresponds to the number of suspensions of the second special symbol.

  If it is determined in step S16103 that the probability variation function is not inoperative, that is, the probability variation gaming state (NO in step S16103), it is determined whether or not to execute reach variation as in the case where the probability variation function is not activated. Judgment is made (step S16109). If the reach lottery is won, it is determined that the reach variation is executed (YES in step S16109), and the table 24 (see FIG. 46) is selected. However, the reach determination value is 0 only when the short time function is activated and the probability variation function is activated in the second special symbol deviation variation pattern table setting process.

  When it is determined in step S16109 that the reach variation is not executed, that is, if the reach lottery is not won (NO in step S16109), the number of second special symbols held immediately after the start of the variation (that is, the second special symbol hold counter 713 ( It is determined whether or not the counter value (see FIG. 23) is 0 (step S16111). When it is determined that the number of reserved special symbols immediately after the start of fluctuation is zero (YES in step S16111), table 32 is selected (step S16112), and when the number of reserved special symbols is not zero (step S16112). The table 33 is selected (NO in S16111) (step S16113).

  When each variation pattern table is selected in step S16102, step S16105, step S16107, step S16108, step S16110, step S16112, and step S16113, the second special symbol out-of-design variation pattern table setting process is terminated.

  It should be noted that when the time-shortening function is not activated, that is, when the time-shortage game is not being executed by the time-shortening game execution means 742, as can be seen by comparing FIG. 41 and FIG. In the table setting process, a reach lottery is performed (step S16003), and the table 19 in which only the reach effect is set as a variation pattern is selected in response to the winning of the reach lottery (step S16004), while the second In the special symbol deviation variation pattern table setting process, the table 22 in which only the reach effect is set as the variation pattern is selected without performing the reach lottery (step S16102). Accordingly, when the game ball wins the second start port 392 or the third start port 394 when the time reduction function is not activated, the reach variation is always executed. Thereby, when the time-shortening function is not activated, the second start port 392 and the third start port 394 become more prestigious than the first start port 390, and a decrease in interest can be suppressed.

  When the table 22 (see FIG. 46) is selected in the second special symbol deviation variation pattern table setting process, a variation pattern random number is acquired, and based on the acquired variation pattern random number, the variation number 73 is out of normal (1 Pre-pattern), normal deviation of variation number 74 (after one symbol), planet reach A variation number 76 (before encore), planet reach A variation number 77 (after encore), planet reach A long variation number 79 Out of Planet Reach B (Via Planet Reach A), Fluctuation Number 81, Planet Reach C (Via Planet Reach A), Fluctuation Number 85, Planet Reach D (Via Planet Reach A) These fluctuation patterns are 27500 / 64,000, 27500/64000, 2000/64000, and 2/64000, respectively. 00,64000 minutes of 4400,64000 minutes of 100 of 400,64000 minutes, and, selected in 100 probability of 64000 minutes. Then, a command corresponding to the selected variation pattern is set as an effect command, and a variation time corresponding to the selected variation pattern is set in the timer. For example, when normal out (one symbol before) is selected with a probability of 27500 of 64000, the command 49H corresponding to the fluctuation pattern of normal out (one symbol before) is set as a production command, and the variation time value is 9500 ms. Set to timer. When the variation pattern of this normal deviation (one symbol before) is selected, the reach variation is executed after the decoration symbol displayed on the effect display device 115 starts to be varied. It is an aspect, and the decorative symbol is stopped and displayed with the symbol immediately before the reach symbol (for example, symbol 6 when symbol 7 is reached). Similarly, other variation patterns are selected with their respective probabilities, a command corresponding to the selected variation pattern is set as an effect command, and a variation time value corresponding to the selected variation pattern is set in the timer.

  When the table 23 (see FIG. 46) is selected in the second special symbol variation pattern table setting process, the variation pattern random number is acquired, and the planet reach B intro of the variation number 22 is acquired based on the acquired variation pattern random number. Off, Planet Reach B with change number 25 out of first half, Out of Planet Reach B with change number 27, Out of Planet Reach C with change number 29, Out of first half of Planet Reach C with change number 32, Second half of Planet Reach C with change number 34 One of the fluctuation patterns, out of the planet reach D intro of the change number 36, out of the first half of the planet reach D of the change number 39, and out of the second half of the planet reach D of the change number 41, is 100/64000, 64000, respectively. 25000 / min, 25000/64000, 50/64000, 3450/64000, 6 000 of 50,64000 minutes of 3450,64000 minutes of minutes 3450, and, to select with a probability of 3450 of 64000 minutes. Then, a command corresponding to the selected variation pattern is set as an effect command, and a variation time corresponding to the selected variation pattern is set in the timer. For example, when planetary reach B intro miss is selected with a probability of 100/64000, command 16H corresponding to the fluctuation pattern of planet reach B intro is set as a production command, and 25700 ms is set as a variation time value in a timer. . When this variation pattern of the planet reach B intro is selected, the decorative pattern displayed on the effect display device 115 is displayed in a variable manner, and then the planet pattern (B) is displayed with the reach effect, but the character (alien) Before the dance is performed, the decorative symbols are stopped and displayed in a manner different from the long hit, short hit and small hit. Similarly, other variation patterns are selected with respective probabilities, a command corresponding to the selected variation pattern is set as an effect command, and a variation time value corresponding to the selected variation pattern is set in the timer.

  When the table 24 (see FIG. 46) is selected in the second special symbol deviation variation pattern table setting process, a variation pattern random number is acquired, and the planet reach B door with the variation number 46 is acquired based on the acquired variation pattern random number. One of the fluctuation patterns of the first release of the planet reach C door with the change number 55 and the change of the first change of the planet reach D door with the change number 64 is 40000 for 64,000 and 64,000 minutes for the change, respectively. Select with a probability of 12000 and 12000 of 14000. Then, a command corresponding to the selected variation pattern is set as an effect command, and a variation time corresponding to the selected variation pattern is set in the timer. For example, when the variation of the first planet reach B door is selected with a probability of 40000/60000 as the variation pattern, the command 2EH corresponding to the variation variation of the selected first one of the planet reach B doors is set as an effect command. Then, 21800 ms is set in the timer as the variation time value. When this planet reach B door is selected, the decoration pattern displayed on the effect display device 115 is variably displayed, and then the planet pattern (B) is displayed and the character (alien) dances. Super reach is displayed, and then the door is closed from the left and right so as to cover the character (alien), and the decorative symbols are stopped and displayed in a manner different from long hit, short hit and small hit. Similarly, the variation pattern of the first release of Planet Reach C door and the first release of Planet Reach D door is also selected with a probability of 12000/64000, and commands 37H and 40H corresponding to the variation pattern are set as production commands. At the same time, 18600 ms is set in the timer as the variation time value.

  When the table 30 (see FIG. 47) is selected in the second special symbol variation pattern table setting process, the variation pattern of the short time normal variation 2 of the variation number 6 is always selected, and the table 31 (see FIG. 47) is selected. When this is done, the fluctuation pattern of the short time fluctuation 2 with the fluctuation number 7 is always selected, and when the table 32 (see FIG. 47) is selected, the fluctuation pattern of the short time normal fluctuation 1 with the fluctuation number 4 is always selected. 47 is always selected, the fluctuation pattern of the short shortening fluctuation 1 of the fluctuation number 5 is selected, and when the table 33 (see FIG. 47) is selected, the fluctuation pattern of the short time normal fluctuation 2 of the fluctuation number 6 is always selected. select.

  That is, in the variation pattern table setting process at the time of the second special symbol outage, if the time is short-time operation, the variation pattern is selected according to the number of second special symbols held (that is, the counter value by the second special symbol holding counter 713). Will be. Therefore, if the number of holdings of the second special symbol immediately after the start of the change is 0 and the probability change function is not activated, the short normal change 2 of the change number 6 is selected, and the command 06H is set as an effect command. At the same time, 5200 ms is set in the timer as the variation time value.

  Also, if the number of reserved special symbols immediately after the start of variation is 0 and the probability variation function is activated, the short normal variation 1 of variation number 4 is selected, and command 04H is set as an effect command. At the same time, 4800 ms is set in the timer as the variation time value. On the other hand, if the number of holdings of the second special symbol immediately after the start of the change is 1, 2 or 3, and the probability change function is not activated, the time shortening change 2 of the change number 7 is selected, and the command 07H is used as an effect command. At the same time, 2300 ms is set in the timer as the variation time value. Also, if the number of reserved 2nd special symbols immediately after the start of the change is 1, 2 or 3, and the probability change function is activated, select the short shortening change 1 of the change number 5 and set the command 05H as an effect command. In addition, 2200 ms is set in the timer as the fluctuation time value.

  Thus, when the probability variation function is not activated, when the variation number 6 is selected, the variation time is longer than when the variation number 7 is selected, and when the probability variation function is activated, the variation number 4 is When selected, the variation time becomes longer than when variation number 5 is selected. Therefore, regardless of whether or not the probability variation function is activated, if the time reduction function is activated, the variation time is zero when the number of reserved symbols of the second special symbol is 1, 2 or 3. become longer. As a result, if the time reduction function is activated, the variation time will be longer when the number of second special symbols held is 0 than when 1, 2, or 3, so that the decorative symbols will not change. It can suppress the decrease of interest by. That is, during the short-time operation, the pair of movable pieces 396 are opened and closed, so that the game balls that are driven toward the game area 37 are more likely to win the third starting port 394 than the first starting port 390. When the short-time function is activated, it is common that the number of second special symbols to be retained is greater than the number of first special symbols to be retained. Therefore, if the number of second special symbols is zero, the first special symbol is to be retained. The number is also likely to be zero. Therefore, the fall of interest can be suppressed by lengthening the fluctuation time when the number of reserved special symbols is zero. In all of the variation numbers 4, 5, 6, and 7, after the start of the variation of the decorative design displayed on the effect display device 115, the reach design is not accompanied by the reach effect, and the decorative design is per- And stop display in a manner different from any of the small hits and small hits.

  As described above, when the variation pattern setting process described with reference to FIGS. 33 to 47 is summarized, the processes performed by the first display mode determination unit 810 and the second display mode determination unit 820 (see FIG. 55) described later are as follows. It is as follows.

  In the lottery performed by the first special symbol lottery means 700, when the jackpot is won and the winning jackpot is a long win, the first display mode determining means 810 uses the first special symbol image display control means 851 to display the common symbol display area 115c. The table (one of Tables 1 to 6) determined based on the game state when winning per long and the type per long (per short length or normal length per probability change) A predetermined per-length display mode is selected and determined from the long-length display modes stored in the table (step S1540). Each of the tables 1 to 6 stores a plurality of per-length display modes.

  When the jackpot is won in the lottery by the first special symbol lottery means 700, and the winning jackpot is short hit, the first display mode determining means 810 uses the first special symbol image display control means 851 to display the common symbol display area 115c. The display mode to be displayed on the table is determined based on the gaming state when the short win is won (one of the tables 13 to 15) stored in the short win display mode stored in the predetermined short win The display mode is selected and determined (step S1560). Each of the tables 13 to 15 stores a plurality of short hit display modes.

  In the lottery by the first special symbol lottery means 700, when the big win is lost and the small win is won, the first display mode determining means 810 displays the common symbol display area 115c by the first special symbol image display control means 851. The display mode is changed to a predetermined small hit display mode from among the small hit display modes stored in the table (any one of the tables 16 to 18) determined based on the gaming state when winning the small hit. The selection is determined (step S1580). Each of the tables 16 to 18 stores a plurality of small hit display modes.

  In the lottery by the first special symbol lottery means 700, when the big win is lost, and even when the jackpot is also lost, the first special symbol image display control means 851 displays a display mode displayed in the common symbol display area 115c. Outgoing display mode or reach miss stored in a table (table 19 or any one of tables 25 to 27) determined based on the gaming state when played (that is, when the lottery result is missed) A predetermined out-of-display mode or reach out-of-reach display mode is determined from the display modes (step S1600). Specifically, in the lottery by the first special symbol lottery means 700, when a big win is lost and even a small win is lost, a lottery for determining whether or not a reach effect is performed (step S16003, step S16007, step S16011, step S16014). ) And is out of the reach lottery, one of the tables 25 to 27 is selected based on the counter value of the first special symbol holding counter 703 (step S16005, step S16009, step S16013, step S16016) When the reach lottery is won, the table 19 is selected (step S16004, step S16008, step S16012, step S16015). That is, when the lottery is lost, one of the tables 25 to 27 is selected on the basis of the number of holds, and the off display mode stored in the selected table is displayed. When the reach lottery is won, the predetermined reach out display mode is selected from the plurality of reach out display modes stored in the table 19.

  When the jackpot is won in the lottery by the second special symbol lottery means 710, and the winning jackpot is a long win, the second display mode determining means 820 is made the common symbol display area 115c by the second special symbol image display control means 852. The table (one of tables 7 to 12) determined based on the gaming state when winning per long and the type per long (per short length or normal length per probability change) A special display mode per length is selected and determined from the special display modes per length stored in the table (step S1550). Each of the tables 7 to 12 stores a plurality of special display modes per length.

  In the lottery by the second special symbol lottery means 710, when the big win is lost, and even when the jackpot is also lost, the second special symbol image display control means 852 displays the display mode displayed in the common symbol display area 115c by the lottery. Reach out special display stored in a table (one of tables 22 to 24 and tables 30 to 33) determined based on the gaming state when it is performed (ie, when the lottery result is out) A predetermined reach out special display mode or out special display mode is determined from the mode or out special display mode (step S1600). Specifically, if the time reduction function is not activated when a lottery with a lottery result being out is performed, the table 22 is selected, and a predetermined one of the plurality of reach-off special display modes stored in the table 22 is selected. Is determined to be a special display mode out of reach. On the other hand, if the time reduction function is activated when the lottery with the lottery result being out is performed, the reach lottery is performed. If the reach lottery is won, the table 23 or the table 24 is selected based on the gaming state. (Step S16105, Step S16110). In addition, if the draw is lost in the reach lottery, any of the tables 30 to 33 is determined based on the gaming state and the counter value of the second special symbol hold counter 713 (steps S16107, 16108, step S16112, step S16113).

  In the lottery by the second special symbol lottery means 710, when the jackpot is won and the winning jackpot is short hit, the display mode displayed in the common symbol display area 115c by the second special symbol image display control means 852, Similarly to the display mode displayed in the common symbol display area 115c by the first special symbol image display control means 851 when the lottery result by the one special symbol lottery means 700 is short-winning, the gaming state when the short-winning is won Is determined to be any one of the tables 13 to 15, and a predetermined short hit display mode is selected and determined from the determined tables (step S1560).

  The first special symbol is displayed in the common symbol display area 115c by the second special symbol image display control means 852 when the big bonus is lost in the lottery by the second special symbol lottery means 710 and the small bonus is won. Similar to the display mode displayed in the common symbol display area 115c by the first special symbol image display control means 851 when the lottery result by the lottery means 700 is a small hit, it is based on the gaming state at the time of winning the small hit. Any one of the tables 16 to 18 is determined, and a predetermined small hit display mode is selected and determined from the determined tables (step S1580).

  Note that the short win display mode and the small win display mode are not limited to the same display mode in the case of being based on the lottery by the first special symbol lottery means 700 and in the case of being based on the lottery by the second special symbol lottery means 710. However, the display modes may be very similar to each other, for example, the variation times are slightly different.

  In the present embodiment, “immediately after the start of variation” means immediately after the first special symbol counter or the second special symbol counter is subtracted in the variation start process (step S130).

[In-flight processing]
Next, the changing process will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 48 is a flowchart illustrating an example of the changing process. In the changing process, first, it is determined whether or not the special symbol is changing (step S1801). That is, it is determined whether either the first special symbol display 84 or the second special symbol display 86 is changing. If it is determined that the special symbol is not changing (NO in step S1801), the changing process is ended as it is.

  If it is determined in step S1801 that the special symbol is changing (YES in step S1801), the process proceeds to step S1802, and it is determined whether or not the variable time has ended. That is, it is determined whether or not the variation time set in the timer has elapsed in the variation pattern setting process. If it is determined that the fluctuation time has not elapsed (NO in step S1802), the changing process is terminated as it is. If it is determined that the fluctuation time has elapsed (YES in step S1802), the special symbol fluctuation is stopped (step S1803). That is, the first special symbol lottery means 700 or the second special symbol lottery means 710 (both see FIG. 23) in the changing one of the first special symbol indicator 84 or the second special symbol indicator 86. A result is derived and displayed, and a change stop command is output to the peripheral control board 662.

  When the variation of the special symbol is stopped (step S1803), it is determined whether or not the big hit flag is ON (step S1804). That is, as a result of the fact that the current variation is stopped and the lottery result is derived, it is determined whether or not the big hit game is started. If it is determined that the jackpot flag is ON (YES in step S1804), the processing flag is updated to “3” (step S1805), and the changing process is terminated. If it is determined that the big hit flag is not ON (NO in step S1804), it is next determined whether or not the small hit flag is ON (step S1806). That is, it is determined whether or not the small hit game is started as a result of the fact that the current fluctuation is stopped and the lottery result is derived. If it is determined that the small hit flag is ON (YES in step S1806), the processing flag is updated to “4” (step S1807), and the changing process is terminated. If it is determined that the small hit flag is not ON (NO in step S1806), the processing flag is updated to “0” (step S1808), and the changing process is terminated.

[Big hit game start processing]
Next, an example of the jackpot game start process will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 49 is a flowchart illustrating an example of the jackpot game start process. In this jackpot game start process, first, it is determined whether or not the probability variation function is in operation (step S2001). Specifically, whether or not the probability variation game execution means 740 controls the first special symbol success / failure determination means 704 and the second special symbol success / failure determination means 714, that is, the first special symbol success / failure determination means 704 and the second special symbol success / failure determination means 704. It is determined whether or not the determination of success / failure by the symbol appropriateness determination means 714 (see FIG. 23 for both) is made based on the special symbol probability change time determination table 708. If it is determined that the probability variation function is in operation (YES in step S2001), the operation of the probability variation function is stopped (step S2002), and the process proceeds to step S2003. On the other hand, if it is determined that the probability variation function is not in operation (NO in step S2001), the process directly proceeds to step S2003.

  In step S2003, it is determined whether or not the time reduction function is operating. Specifically, whether or not the short-time game execution means 742 controls the normal symbol success / failure determination means 724 (both see FIG. 23), that is, whether or not the normal symbol success / failure determination means 724 determines whether or not the normal symbol success / failure determination means 724 It is determined whether or not to make a determination based on the determination table. If it is determined that the time reduction function is in operation (YES in step S2003), the operation of the time reduction function is stopped (step S2004), and the process proceeds to step S2005. On the other hand, if it is determined that the time-saving function is not operating (NO in step S2003), the process directly proceeds to step S2005.

  In step S2005, it is determined whether or not it is a long hit. Specifically, it is confirmed whether or not the long hit flag is ON, and if it is ON, it is determined that the long hit flag is ON. If it is determined that it is per long (YES in step S2005), the number of rounds per long, the opening time per round, the limit number are set, and the opening / closing device to be opened is set. Specifically, the number of rounds is set to 15 rounds, for example, the opening time per round is set to 30 seconds, the limit number is set to 9 pieces, and the opening / closing device to be opened is set to the jackpot gaming opening / closing device 400. If it is determined that it is not long hit, the number of short hit rounds, the opening time per round, the limit number are set, and the opening / closing device to be opened is set. Specifically, the number of rounds is set to, for example, 2 rounds, the opening time per round is set to, for example, 0.3 seconds, the limited number is set to, for example, 9 and the opening / closing device to be opened is set to the jackpot gaming opening / closing device 400 .

  When the number of rounds, the opening time per round, the limit number, and the opening / closing device to be opened are set in either step S2006 or step S2007, the processing flag is updated to “5” (step S2008), and the jackpot game starts The process ends.

[Small hit game start processing]
Next, based on FIG. 50, an example of a small hit game start process will be described. FIG. 50 is a flowchart illustrating an example of the small hit game start process. In the small hit game starting process, first, the number of small hits released, the opening time per time, the limit number, and the opening device to be opened are set (step S2201). Specifically, the number of times of opening is set to 2 times, for example, the opening time per time is set to 0.3 seconds, the limited number is set to 9 times, for example, and the opening device to be opened is set to the jackpot game opening / closing device 400 . Thereafter, the process flag is updated to “6” and the small hit game start process is terminated.

[Special electric utility jackpot control processing]
Next, an example of the special electric utility jackpot control process will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 51 is a flowchart illustrating an example of the special electric utility jackpot control process. First, in the special electric utility jackpot control process, it is determined whether or not the jackpot game opening / closing device 400 is being opened (step S2401). If it is determined that the jackpot gaming opening / closing device 400 is open (YES in step S2401), it is then determined whether or not a predetermined opening time of the jackpot gaming opening / closing device 400 has elapsed (step S2402). . Specifically, it is determined whether or not the opening time set in the jackpot game start process has been reached. If it is determined that the opening time of the jackpot gaming opening / closing device 400 has elapsed (YES in step S2402), the jackpot gaming opening / closing device 400 is closed (step S2404), and the special electric accessory jackpot control process is terminated.

  If it is determined in step S2402 that the opening time of the jackpot gaming opening / closing device 400 has not elapsed (NO in step S2402), it is determined whether or not a predetermined limited number of gaming balls have been received by the jackpot gaming switching device 400. Judgment is made (step S2403). Specifically, it is determined whether or not the limited number of game balls set in the jackpot game start process has been received by the jackpot game opening / closing device 400 on which the opening operation is being performed. If it is determined that a limited number of game balls have been received by the jackpot gaming switch 400 that is executing the opening operation (YES in step S2403), the jackpot gaming switch 400 is closed (step S2404), and the special electric The bonus jackpot control process is terminated. If it is determined that the limited number of game balls has not been received by the jackpot gaming opening / closing device 400 (NO in step S2403), the special electric utility jackpot control process is terminated.

  If it is determined in step S2401 that the jackpot gaming opening / closing device 400 is not open (NO in step S2401), it is determined whether or not a predetermined number of rounds has been reached (step S2405). Specifically, it is determined whether or not the number of rounds set in the jackpot game start process has been reached. If it is determined that the predetermined number of rounds has not been reached (NO in step S2405), the jackpot game opening / closing device 400 is opened (step S2406), and the special electric accessory jackpot control process is terminated.

  If it is determined in step S2405 that the predetermined number of rounds has been reached (YES in step S2405), the jackpot flag is turned off (step S2407), and it is determined whether or not the current jackpot is accompanied by a probability fluctuation ( Step S2408). Specifically, when it is determined that the result determined using the design random number is a probability variation, it is determined that the probability variation is accompanied. If it is determined that the jackpot is accompanied by a probability fluctuation (YES in step S2408), the probability fluctuation function is activated (step S2409), and then it is determined whether the jackpot is a long hit. Specifically, if the long hit flag is ON, it is determined that the long hit is reached. If it is determined that it is a long hit (YES in step S2410), the long hit flag is turned OFF (step S2411), then the time reduction function is activated (step S2412), and the process proceeds to step S2418.

  If it is determined in step S2401 that it is not long hit (NO in step S2410), the short hit flag is turned off (step S2413), and then it is determined whether or not the winning operation is in the short-time function operation (step S2414). That is, when the short hit is made, the short hit flag is turned OFF, and the process proceeds to step S2414 to determine whether or not the short time function is in operation. If it is determined that the winning function is in operation (YES in step S2414), the operation of the shortening function is started (step S2412), and the process proceeds to step S2418.

  Returning to step S2408, if it is determined that the jackpot is not accompanied by probability fluctuation (NO in step S2408), the long hit flag is turned off (step S2415), the operation of the time reduction function is started (step S2416), and the time reduction function is activated. A prescribed number of operations (for example, 100) is set (step S2417), and the process proceeds to step S2418.

  In step S2418, the processing flag is updated to “0”, and the special symbol electric accessory big hit control process is terminated. The special electric accessory is a concept including a jackpot game opening / closing device 400 and a jackpot game opening / closing solenoid 642.

[Special electric accessory small hit control processing]
Next, an example of the special electric accessory small hit control process will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 52 is a flowchart illustrating an example of the special electric accessory small hit control process. In the special electric accessory small hit control process, first, it is determined whether or not a predetermined limited number of game balls have been received by the big hit game opening / closing device 400 (step S2501). Specifically, it is determined whether or not the limited number (for example, nine) of game balls set in the small hit game start process has been received by the big hit game opening / closing device 400. If it is determined that the limited number of game balls are not accepted by the jackpot gaming switching device 400 (NO in step S2501), it is determined whether or not the jackpot gaming switching device 400 is open (step S2502). If it is determined that the jackpot gaming opening / closing device 400 is not open (NO in step S2502), the jackpot gaming opening / closing device 400 is opened (step S2503), and the special electric accessory small hitting control process is terminated.

  If it is determined in step S2502 that the jackpot gaming opening / closing device 400 is being opened (YES in step S2502), it is determined whether or not a predetermined opening time of the jackpot gaming switching device 400 has elapsed (step S2504). Specifically, it is determined whether or not the opening time (for example, 0.3 seconds) set in the small hit game start process has elapsed. If it is determined that the opening time of the predetermined jackpot gaming opening / closing device 400 has not elapsed (NO in step S2504), the special electric accessory small hit control process is terminated.

  If it is determined in step S2504 that the predetermined opening time of the jackpot gaming opening / closing device 400 has elapsed (YES in step S2504), the jackpot gaming opening / closing device 400 is closed (step S2505), and the predetermined number of opening times is reached. It is determined whether or not it has been done (step S2506). Specifically, it is determined whether or not the number of times the jackpot game opening / closing device 400 has been opened has reached the number of times of opening (for example, two times) set in the small hit game start procedure. At this time, if it is determined that the predetermined number of releases has not been reached (NO in step S2506), the electric accessory small hit control process is terminated as it is. On the other hand, if it is determined that the number of times the jackpot game opening / closing device 400 has been opened reaches a predetermined number of times of opening (YES in step S2506), the process proceeds to step S2509.

  Returning to step S2501, if it is determined that a limited number of game balls have been received by the jackpot gaming switch 400 (YES in step S2501), it is determined whether or not the jackpot gaming switch 400 is open (step). S2507). If it is determined that the jackpot gaming opening / closing device 400 is open (YES in step S2507), the jackpot gaming opening / closing device 400 is closed (step S2508), and the process proceeds to step S2509. Returning to step S2507, if it is determined that the jackpot gaming opening / closing device 400 is not open (NO in step S2507), the process directly proceeds to step S2509.

  In step S2509, the processing flag is updated to “0”, and the special electric accessory small hitting control process is terminated.

  In this embodiment, the opening time of the jackpot gaming opening / closing device 400 is set to 0.3 seconds, for example. In step S2501, it is determined whether or not the maximum winning number (for example, 9) has been won in the jackpot gaming opening / closing device 400. If the maximum winning number has been won, the predetermined number of opening (for example, 2) has been reached. Even if not, the small hit game ends. However, since the opening time of the jackpot gaming opening / closing device 400 in the small hit game is set so that it is extremely difficult to win the maximum winning number, it is determined in advance in most cases without winning the maximum winning number. The jackpot game opening / closing device 400 will be opened.

[About fluctuation time]
Next, based on FIG. 53, an example of the fluctuation time concerning the deviation fluctuation pattern when the time-shortening function is not operated will be described. FIG. 53 is a timing chart showing the variation time according to the unsuccessful variation pattern without the reach effect when the short-time function is not activated. FIG. 53 (A) shows the variation time of the first special symbol when the number of reserved symbols of the first special symbol is 0 or 1 (that is, the variation time in the case of the normal variation of variation number 1). The variation time in this case is 11800 ms. FIG. 53 (B) shows the variation time of the first special symbol when the number of reserved symbols of the first special symbol is 2 (that is, the variation time in the case of the short variation 1 of the variation number 2). The variation time in this case is 6000 ms. FIG. 53 (C) shows the variation time of the first special symbol when the number of reserved special symbols is three (ie, the variation time in the case of the short variation 2 of the variation number 3). The variation time in this case is 2900 ms. From the above, in the case of a detachment that does not involve a reach effect when the time-shortening function is not activated, the variation time of the first special symbol becomes longer as the number of retained first special symbols is smaller. When the time-shortening function is not activated, it is more difficult for a game ball that is driven toward the game area 37 to win the second start port 392 or the third start port 394 than to win the first start port 390. When the number of reservations for the first special symbol becomes zero, the possibility that the number of reservations for the second special symbol is also zero is high. If both the hold of the first special symbol and the hold of the second special symbol become 0, neither the first special symbol nor the second special symbol is changed, and the interest is lowered. Therefore, in the case of a detachment that does not involve a reach effect when the time-shortening function is not activated, a decrease in interest can be suppressed by increasing the variation time of the first special symbol as the number of first special symbol reservations decreases.

  53D and 53E show the variation time of the second special symbol (that is, the variation time in the case of the variation number 73 and the variation number 74). When the time-shortening function is not activated and the determination result by the second special symbol success / failure determination means 714 is out of place, any of FIGS. 53 (D) and (E) regardless of the number of second special symbols held. It will be the fluctuation time. Therefore, there is no correlation between the number of reserved special symbols and the variation time of the second special symbol, and the variation time of the second special symbol is determined regardless of the number of retained special symbols. In addition, when the determination result by the second special symbol success / failure determination means 714 is out of the range (not long hit, short hit or small hit), the variation number 73 or the variation number 74 is selected. Is executed. In addition, since the pair of movable pieces 396 are closed when the time-shortening function is not activated, it is almost impossible for the game ball that has been driven toward the game area 37 to win the third starting port 394. In addition, since it is more difficult for a game ball to win the second start port 392 than to win a game ball to the first start port 390, the game ball that has been driven toward the game area 37 enters the second start port 392. By always changing the reach when winning, it is possible to give a premium feeling to the winning to the second starting port 392 and to suppress a decrease in interest. Note that the variation time in the case of FIG. 53 (D) is 9500 ms, and the variation time in the case of FIG. 53 (E) is 11300 ms.

  Next, based on FIG. 54, a description will be given of a variation time required for a deviation variation pattern without a reach effect at the time-shortening function operation. FIG. 54 is a timing chart showing the variation time required for the unsuccessful variation pattern without the reach effect when the time-shortening function is activated. FIG. 54 (A) shows the variation time of the first special symbol when the probability variation function is activated (that is, the time shortening variation 1 of the variation number 5). The variation time in this case is 2200 ms. FIG. 54 (B) shows the variation time of the second special symbol when the probability variation function is not activated (that is, the time shortening variation 2 of the variation number 7). The variation time in this case is 2300 ms. Therefore, although the variation time of the first special symbol varies depending on whether the probability variation function is not activated or activated, there is a correlation between the number of reserved first symbol symbols and the variation time of the first special symbol. Instead, it is determined regardless of the number of reserved first symbols.

  FIG. 54C shows the variation time of the second special symbol (that is, the short time normal variation 1 of the variation number 4) when the probability variation function is activated and the number of the second special symbol hold is zero. . The variation time in this case is 4800 ms. FIG. 54 (D) shows the variation time of the second special symbol when the probability variation function is activated and the number of reserved second special symbols is 1 or more (that is, the short time variation 1 of variation number 5). Yes. The variation time in this case is 2200 ms. FIG. 54E shows the variation time of the second special symbol (that is, the short time normal variation 2 of the variation number 6) in the case where the probability changing function is not activated and the second special symbol holding number is 0. Yes. The variation time in this case is 5200 ms. FIG. 54 (F) shows the variation time of the second special symbol when the probability variation function has not been activated and the number of reserved second symbol symbols is 1 or more (that is, the short time variation variation 2 of variation number 7). ing. The variation time in this case is 2300 ms. From the above, in the case of a departure without a reach effect at the time-shortening function operation, the variation time of the second special symbol becomes longer as the number of second special symbols held is smaller. More specifically, when the number of reservations of the second special symbol is 0, the number of reservations of the second special symbol is longer than that when it is 1 or more. Since the opening / closing operation of the pair of movable pieces 396 is executed at the time-shortening function operation, the game ball that is driven toward the game area 37 is much easier than winning the first start port 390. It becomes possible to win 394. Therefore, when the number of reservations of the second special symbol becomes zero, there is a high possibility that the number of reservations of the second special symbol is also zero. If both the hold of the first special symbol and the hold of the second special symbol become 0, neither the first special symbol nor the second special symbol is changed, and the interest is lowered. Therefore, in the case of detachment without a reach effect at the time-shortening function operation, the variation time of the second special symbol when the second special symbol hold number is 0, and the second special symbol hold number is one or more By making it longer than the variation time of the second special symbol in, a decrease in interest can be suppressed.

[Variation of the decorative pattern displayed on the effect display device]
Next, with reference to FIG. 24, a variation aspect of the decorative symbol 1153 displayed on the effect display device 115 will be described.

  As shown in FIG. 24, the decorative symbol 1153 displayed on the effect display device 115 (common symbol display area 115c) is composed of a plurality of symbol strings. In this embodiment, the decorative symbol 1153 is displayed on the left side when viewed from the player. Left symbol row 1153a, a middle symbol row 1153b displayed in the middle when viewed from the player, and a right symbol row 1153c displayed on the right side when viewed from the player. The variation of the decorative symbol 1153 is a scroll variation in which the left symbol row 1153a, the middle symbol row 1153b, and the right symbol row 1153c are scrolled in the vertical direction (more specifically, the direction from the top to the bottom as viewed from the player). It is. And it stops in order of the left symbol row 1153a, the right symbol row 1153c, and the middle symbol row 1153b.

  First, a variation aspect of the decorative symbol 1153 when the lottery result by the first special symbol lottery means 700 is derived to the effect display device 115 will be described. In this case, the variation in which each stop symbol of the left symbol row 1153a, the middle symbol row 1153b, and the right symbol row 1153c stops at a different symbol that is completely unrelated is the “off-change without accompanying the reach effect” in the present embodiment. . On the other hand, when the stop symbol in the left symbol row 1153a and the stop symbol in the right symbol row 1153c are the same, reach is derived, and only the middle symbol row 1153b is scrolled. As a result, the variation of the decoration symbol 1153 when only the stop symbol of the middle symbol row 1153b is different is the “displacement variation with reach effect” in the present embodiment. Further, the variation of the decorative symbol 1153 when all of the left symbol column 1153a, the right symbol column 1153c, and the middle symbol column 1153b stop at the same symbol is the “big hit variation” in the present embodiment.

  Note that the variation mode of the decorative symbol 1153 when the lottery result by the first special symbol lottery means 700 is derived to the effect display device 115 is a scroll that scrolls in the vertical direction regardless of whether or not the time reduction function is activated. It is a fluctuation.

  Next, a variation aspect of the decorative symbol 1153 when the lottery result by the second special symbol lottery means is derived to the effect display device 115 when the time-shortening function is not operated will be described. In this case, the left symbol row 1153a and the right symbol row 1153c are rotated and displayed so as to alternately display the front and back surfaces while staying at substantially the same position as the stop position before the start of fluctuation, and the middle symbol row 1153b is scrolled vertically. Scroll fluctuations. Then, the left symbol row 1153a and the right symbol row 1153c stop rotating almost simultaneously, and then the middle symbol row 1153b stops.

  The stop symbol in the left symbol row 1153a and the stop symbol in the right symbol row 1153c are always the same symbol, and reach is derived, and only the middle symbol row 1153b is scrolled. As a result, when only the stop symbol of the middle symbol row 1153b is different, the variation of the decorative symbol 1153 is “displacement variation with reach effect” in the present embodiment. If all of the left symbol row 1153a, the right symbol row 1153c, and the middle symbol row 1153b stop at the same symbol due to the scroll variation, the variation of the decorative symbol 1153 is the “big hit variation” in the present embodiment.

  Here, when the lottery result by the second special symbol lottery means 710 is derived to the effect display device 115 when the time-shortening function is activated, the variation pattern of the decorative symbol 1153 is that the lottery result by the first special symbol lottery means 700 is the effect display device. 115 is almost the same as the variation pattern of the decorative design 1153 when derived to 115. That is, the variation of the decorative symbol 1153 is a scroll variation in which all of the left symbol row 1153a, the middle symbol row 1153b, and the right symbol row 1153c are scrolled in the vertical direction (more specifically, from the top to the bottom as viewed from the player). It is. And it stops in order of the left symbol row 1153a, the right symbol row 1153c, and the middle symbol row 1153b.

  Thus, if the time-shortening function is not activated, the variation pattern of the decorative symbol 1153 when the lottery result by the first special symbol lottery means 700 is derived to the effect display device 115, and the second special symbol lottery means 710. The variation pattern of the decorative symbol 1153 when the lottery result is derived to the effect display device 115 is different. On the other hand, if the time reduction function is activated, the variation mode of the decorative symbol 1153 when the lottery result by the first special symbol lottery means 700 is derived to the effect display device 115 and the lottery result by the second special symbol lottery means 710. Is the same as the variation pattern of the decorative symbol 1153 when the symbol is derived to the effect display device 115.

  As described above, if the time reduction function is not activated, the lottery result by the first special symbol lottery means 700 is derived to the effect display device 115 and the lottery result by the second special symbol lottery means 710 is displayed on the effect display device 115. The variation pattern of the decorative design 1153 differs depending on the derived case. On the other hand, when the short-time function is activated, the lottery result by the first special symbol lottery means 700 is derived to the effect display device 115, and the lottery result by the second special symbol lottery means 710 is derived to the effect display device 115. The variation pattern of the decorative design 1153 is almost the same.

  In addition, when the lottery result by each special symbol lottery means is short hit or small hit, both whether the lottery is by the first special symbol lottery means 700 or the second special symbol lottery means 710 Selects the same table 13 and performs the same variation. However, in the case of short hits or small hits, the following special variation modes are performed.

  First, in the same manner as described above, scroll variation is performed in which all of the left symbol row 1153a, the middle symbol row 1153b, and the right symbol row 1153c are scrolled in the vertical direction (more specifically, from the top to the bottom as viewed from the player). It is. Then, after the left symbol row 1153a and the right symbol row 1153c are displayed larger than the display of the middle symbol row 1153b, a predetermined symbol (for example, “1” symbol) stops in the left symbol row 1153a, and then the right symbol row A predetermined symbol (for example, “2” symbol) stops in the column 1153c. The “1” symbol is stopped on the left symbol row 1153a, the “2” symbol is stopped on the right symbol row 1153c, and only the middle symbol row 1153b scrolls in the vertical direction is selected for short or small hits. Reach fluctuation that may have occurred. When a predetermined symbol (for example, “3” symbol) stops in the middle symbol row 1153b, the occurrence of the short hit gaming state or the small hit gaming state is determined.

  Next, based on FIG. 55 and FIG. 56, the fluctuation | variation aspect of the decoration design 1153 is demonstrated. FIG. 55 is a functional block diagram showing mainly functions related to display mode determination, among the functional configurations of the main control board. FIG. 56 is a time chart showing the display modes of the first special symbol and the second special symbol in time series.

  As shown in FIG. 55, when a game ball wins the first start port 390 and is detected by the first start port sensor 644, the first special symbol lottery means 700 performs the lottery as described above. Specifically, when the game ball wins the first start opening 390, the random number for determination of success / failure is acquired by the first special symbol determination determination random number extraction means 702, and the acquired random number value and the determination table for the determination of success / failure (special symbol normal) Based on the hourly determination table 706 or the special symbol probability changing time determination table 708), the first special symbol determination unit 704 determines whether or not the first special symbol is correct.

  The main control board 131 includes first display mode determination means 810 and second display mode determination means 820. The first display mode determination means 810 has a plurality of types (two or more types) stored in the display mode storage means 830 as display modes derived to the effect display device 115 by the first special symbol image display control means 851 (see FIG. 25). ) Is selected and determined from the display modes. The second display mode determining means 820 has a plurality of types (two or more types) stored in the display mode storage means 830 as display modes derived to the effect display device 115 by the second special symbol image display control means 852 (see FIG. 25). ) Is selected and determined from the display modes.

  And based on the result determination by the first special symbol determination unit 704 or the second special symbol determination unit 714, one of the plurality of display modes stored in the display mode storage unit 830 is displayed. The selection is determined, and the command transmission means 749 transmits a command to the peripheral control board 662. The peripheral control board 662 that has received such a command controls display of the display mode selected and determined by the effect image display control means 800 on the effect display device 115.

  Specifically, the 1st display mode determination means 810 judges whether the lottery result by the 1st special symbol lottery means 700 is winning. On the other hand, the 2nd display mode determination means 820 judges whether the lottery by the 2nd special symbol lottery means 710 is winning.

  The first display mode determination means 810 includes a first display mode determination selection means 811, a reach out display mode selection determination means 812, a win display mode selection determination means 813, a out display display mode determination means 814, and an advantageous gaming state out-of-display display mode determination means. 815.

  In the normal gaming state, the off display mode determining means 814 is a off display mode only when the number of holds by the first special symbol hold counter 703 is 0 or 1 and the lottery result by the first special symbol lottery means 700 is off. When the number of holdings by the first special symbol holding counter 703 is 2, it is determined as a shortening variation 1, and when the number of holdings by the first special symbol holding counter 703 is 3 at the maximum, it is determined as a shortening variation 2. .

  The advantageous game state out-of-game display mode determining means 815 changes the time-shortening only when the lottery result by the first special symbol lottery means 700 is out of the short-time gaming state, regardless of the number of holds by the first special symbol hold counter 703. Set to 1 (when the probability changing function is activated) or 2 to shorten the time reduction (when the probability varying function is not activated).

  The first display mode determination / selection unit 811 selects which one of the outlier display mode determination unit 814 and the advantageous gaming state outlier display mode determination unit 815 determines the display mode derived to the common symbol display area 115c. The first display mode determination / selection unit 811 selects the advantageous game state out-of-play display mode determination unit 815 in the advantageous game state, and the advantageous game state in accordance with the transition from the advantageous game state to the normal game state. Instead of the outlier display mode determining means 815, the outlier display mode determining means 814 is selected.

  Reach out-of-reach display mode selection deciding means 812 performs display in the out-of-reach display mode in a lottery that is different from the lottery result by the first special symbol lottery means 700 and that the lottery result by the first special symbol lottery means 700 is off. Only when one of them is selected and determined, one of the two or more reach out-of-reach display modes is further selected and determined. The winning display mode selection determining means 813 selects and determines one long winning display mode from two or more long winning display modes when the lottery result by the first special symbol lottery means 700 is winning. To do.

  The second display mode determination means 820 includes a second display mode determination selection means 821, a reach out special display mode selection determination means 822, a hit special display mode selection determination means 823, a special out display display determination means 824, and an advantageous gaming state reduction off. Display mode determining means 825 is provided.

  The reach out special display mode selection determining unit 822 selects and determines one of the reach out special display modes from among two or more types of reach out special modes when the second special symbol lottery unit 710 is out of the lottery. To do.

  When the lottery by the second special symbol lottery means 710 is a win, the hit special display mode selection determining unit 823 selects and determines one of the hit special display modes from two or more hit special display modes.

  The special display mode determination means 824 for short reach is a special display for short reach out only when the lottery result by the second special symbol lottery means 710 is out, regardless of the number of holds by the second special symbol hold counter 713 in the normal gaming state. The mode or the long reach off special display mode is determined.

  Advantageous gaming state shortening out display mode determining means 825 is only in the case of the short-time gaming state, when the number of holds by the second special symbol hold counter 713 is 0, only when the lottery result by the second special symbol lottery means 710 is out. Time short normal fluctuation 1 (when probability fluctuation is activated) or time short normal fluctuation 2 (when probability fluctuation is not in operation) is determined, and when the number of holdings by the second special symbol holding counter 713 is any one of 1 to 3, the time is shortened. Change 1 (when probability fluctuation is activated) or shortened time fluctuation 2 (when probability fluctuation is not activated).

  The second display mode determination / selection unit 821 selects which of the special display mode determination unit 824 and the advantageous gaming state shortening / exclusion display mode determination unit 825 determines the display mode to be derived to the common symbol display area 115c. . The second display mode determination / selection means 821 selects the advantageous game state shortening / outgoing display mode determination means 825 when the game is in the advantageous game state, and in accordance with the transition from the advantageous game state to the normal game state, In place of the state shortening out-of-display mode determining means 825, the out-of-range special display mode determining means 824 is selected.

  On the other hand, when the game ball wins the second starting port 392 or the third starting port 394, the lottery by the second special symbol lottery means 710 is performed as described above. Specifically, when the game ball wins the second starting port 392 or the third starting port 394, the random number for determination of success / failure is acquired by the random number extraction means for determination 712 for the second special symbol, and the acquired random number value and the determination of success / failure are obtained. Based on the table (special symbol normal time determination table 706 or special symbol probability change time determination table 708), the second special symbol determination unit 714 determines whether or not the second special symbol is correct. Based on the determination result of the second special symbol determination unit 714, the display mode storage unit 830 selects and determines one of the display modes, and the command transmission unit 749 A command is transmitted to the peripheral control board 662. The peripheral control board 662 that has received such a command controls display of the display mode selected and determined by the effect image display control means 800 on the effect display device 115.

  The lottery result by the first special symbol lottery means 700 is derived by the first special symbol image display control means 851 to the common symbol display area 115c (see FIG. 24). The lottery result by the second special symbol lottery means 710 is derived to the common symbol display area 115c by the second special symbol image display control means 852. Note that the lottery result by the first special symbol lottery means 700 and the lottery result by the second special symbol lottery means 710 are all of the tables 1 to 33 stored in the display mode storage means 830 in the common symbol display area 115c. It is derived after the decorative design 1153 is displayed in a variable manner based on one of the tables.

  There are two or more types of per-long display modes and a long reach off display in the display mode of the variation of the decorative symbol 1153 (hereinafter referred to as “the variation of the first special symbol”) for deriving the lottery result by the first special symbol. There are a mode, a short reach out display mode, a short hit display mode, a small hit display mode, and a out display mode. Each of these display modes has a plurality of patterns, all of which are stored in any of the tables 1 to 33 of the display mode storage unit 830.

  The long win display mode is a display mode that is selected and determined only when the lottery result by the first special symbol lottery means 700 is a big win and the big win is a long win. Tables 1 to 6 (see FIG. 35) As shown, six patterns (six types) of display modes are stored. As shown in FIG. 56, the long win display mode includes a symbol variation period and a long reach variation period.

  In the variation of the first special symbol, the variation is started for all of the three decorative symbols 1153, and is stopped and displayed in the order of the left symbol, the right symbol, and the middle symbol. The symbol variation period means a period from the start of variation for all three decorative symbols 1153 to when the right symbol stops (that is, until the variation of only the middle symbol that is the final stop symbol). The long reach fluctuation period is a long reach (generally referred to as super reach) that gives the player the expectation of winning a long win when reaching reach after the end of the symbol change period. It means the time until the middle symbol that is the final stop symbol is stopped and displayed.

  Note that the number of decorative symbols 1153 is not limited to three. For example, if the number of decorative symbols 1153 is plural, the variable display of N symbols (N is 2 or more) among the plural decorative symbols 1153 is started. The symbol variation period is the period until (N-1) symbols out of N symbols are stopped and displayed.

  In FIG. 56, “left” means a stop display of the left symbol, “right” means a stop display of the right symbol, and “middle” means a stop display of the middle symbol.

  The long reach off display mode is a mode that is selected and determined when the lottery result by the first special symbol lottery means 700 is off, and a plurality of display patterns are displayed as shown in Tables 19 to 21 (see FIG. 43). It is stored in the mode storage means 830. Each of these display patterns corresponds to the display pattern in the long win display mode. For example, in the table 1 (see FIG. 35) in which the long hit display mode is selected and determined, the variation number 19 “Planet Reach C (via Planet Reach A) long hit” is stored, and the long reach off display mode is selected. In the table 19 to be determined (see FIG. 43), “displacement of planetary reach C (via planetary reach A)” of variation number 18 corresponding to variation number 19 is stored. When a plurality of symbols (three symbols in this embodiment) are stopped, the symbols are stopped and displayed in a manner in which all of the plurality of symbols match. Thereby, the player can grasp | ascertain that he won per long.

  Further, the long reach out-of-range display mode is a display mode that closely resembles the corresponding long hit display mode over time. Specifically, it has a symbol variation period that is substantially the same as the long-permission display mode and a long reach variation period that is substantially the same as the long-permission display mode. Accordingly, the long reach out-of-range display mode is very similar to the long hit display mode over time. As described above, the long reach out-of-display mode is made to be a display mode that closely resembles the long win display mode over time, so that the player can draw lots by the first special symbol lottery means 700 until the middle symbol is stopped and displayed. It is possible to have a sense of expectation that it may have been won, and to suppress the decline of interest.

  Note that “similarly over time” means that not only the variation mode displayed on the effect display device 115 but also the temporal display mode is very similar. That is, it means that the display mode after x seconds has passed is almost the same. “Extremely similar” means that the player cannot recognize the difference from the viewpoint of the player, and is a concept including “same”.

  The short reach out display mode is a mode that is selected and determined when the lottery result by the first special symbol lottery means 700 is out, and a display mode that is very similar to a part of the long reach out display mode over time. Have. Specifically, the short reach out display mode includes a symbol variation period that is substantially the same as the symbol variation period that is a part of the long reach display mode and the long reach display mode, and a long reach variation period that is a part of the long reach display mode. And a long reach variation period that is very similar over time. Only the final stop symbol (middle symbol) that is finally stopped and displayed at a timing different from that of other symbols among the plurality of symbols is stopped and displayed in a reach manner different from the other symbols (left symbol and right symbol).

  The out-of-display mode is a display mode that closely resembles the symbol variation period that is a part of the short reach out-of-display mode over time. Note that at least one of the plurality of symbols (in this embodiment, the right symbol or the left symbol) is different from the other symbols and is stopped and displayed in a manner different from the reach manner.

  The short win display mode is a display mode that is selected and determined when a big win is won in the lottery by the first special symbol lottery means 700, and the winning big hit is a short win, and is a part of the long win display mode. A symbol variation period that is very similar to the symbol variation period over time is included as part of the variation mode. Specifically, the short hit display mode has a symbol change short period and a short hit reach change period that are very similar to those of the long hit display mode over time. Since the short hit reach variation period has a shorter variation time than the long reach variation period, the variation time of the entire short hit variation mode is shorter than the variation time of the entire long hit display mode. Note that at least one of the plurality of symbols (in this embodiment, the right symbol or the left symbol) is different from the other symbols and is stopped and displayed in a manner different from the reach manner. As a result, even if the game value given to the player is won in the short win, which is smaller than the case where the player is won per long, the player is not given unnecessary expectation, and the interest is reduced. Can be suppressed.

  The small win display mode is a display mode that is selected and determined when a big win is lost in the lottery by the first special symbol lottery means 700 and a small win is won. It is similar. Specifically, the small hit display mode has a symbol variation short period and a small hit reach variation period that are very similar to the symbol variation period of the long hit display mode over time. The small hit reach fluctuation period is very similar to the short hit reach fluctuation period over time. As a result, the entire small hit display mode closely resembles the entire short hit display mode over time. Further, since the small hit reach fluctuation period is substantially the same as the short hit reach fluctuation period, the fluctuation time is shorter than the long reach fluctuation period. Thereby, the variation time of the entire small hit variation mode is shorter than the variation time of the entire long hit display mode. Similar to the short win display mode, at least one of the multiple symbols (in this embodiment, the right symbol or the left symbol) is different from the other symbols and is stopped and displayed in a mode different from the reach mode. As a result, even if the game value given to the player is won in a small win smaller than the case where the player is won per long, the player is not given unnecessary expectation and the interest is reduced. Can be suppressed.

  In addition, the display mode of the variation of the decorative symbol 1153 for deriving the lottery result by the second special symbol (hereinafter referred to as “the variation of the second special symbol”) includes a special display mode per long and a special display out of long reach. There are modes, short reach off special display modes, short hit display modes, and small hit display modes. Each of these display modes has a plurality of patterns, all of which are stored in any of the tables 1 to 33 of the display mode storage unit 830.

  Here, both the short win display mode and the small hit display mode are display modes in which the display mode in the variation of the first special symbol and the display mode in the variation of the second special symbol are the same. Note that the short hit display mode and the small hit display mode are not necessarily the same display mode, and both modes may be similar to each other.

  The long win special display mode is a display mode that is selected and determined only when the lottery result by the second special symbol lottery means 710 is a win, as shown in Tables 7 to 12 (see FIG. 37). The display mode is stored. Moreover, the special display mode per long consists of a symbol variation short period and a long reach variation period. When a plurality of symbols (three symbols in this embodiment) are stopped, the symbols are stopped and displayed in a manner in which all of the plurality of symbols match. Thereby, the player can grasp | ascertain that he won per long.

  In the variation of the second special symbol, among the three decorative symbols 1153, the left symbol and the right symbol perform a rotation variation different from the scroll variation in the first special symbol, and the middle symbol performs a scroll variation. Then, the left symbol and the right symbol are stopped and displayed almost simultaneously, and then the middle symbol is stopped and displayed.

  The symbol variation short period is a period from the start of variation for all three decorative symbols 1153 until the left symbol and the right symbol stop (that is, until the variation of only the middle symbol that is the final stop symbol). means. This symbol variation short period is a variation in which the variation time is shorter than the symbol variation period in the variation of the first special symbol. The long reach variation period is a variation period that is very similar to the long reach variation period in the variation of the first special symbol. The effect during the long reach variation period is memorable for the player in order to give the player a sense of expectation that a jackpot game may occur. As a result, the special display mode for long hits is a display mode that is very similar to the long hit display mode for the first special symbol for the player. Note that the change time of the special display mode per long time is approximately the same as the long reach change period in the change period of the special display mode per long time and the long reach change period in the display mode per long time. However, since it is shorter than the time in the symbol variation period, it becomes shorter than the variation time of the long-range display mode.

  The long reach off special display mode is a mode that is selected and determined when the lottery result by the second special symbol lottery means 710 is off, and there are a plurality of display patterns as shown in Tables 22 to 24 (see FIG. 46). It is stored in the display mode storage unit 830. Each of these display patterns corresponds to the display pattern in the special display mode per long. For example, in the table 7 (see FIG. 37) in which the special display mode per long is selected and determined, the variable number 82 “planet reach B (via planetary reach A) length” is stored, and the special display mode out of long reach is stored. Is stored in the table 22 in which the change number 81 corresponding to the change number 82 is “disconnected from planet reach B (via planet reach A)”. Only the final stop symbol (middle symbol) that is finally stopped and displayed at a timing different from that of other symbols among the plurality of symbols is stopped and displayed in a reach manner different from the other symbols (left symbol and right symbol).

  Moreover, the long reach off special display mode is composed of a display mode that closely resembles the corresponding special per-long display mode over time. Specifically, the long reach off special display mode has a symbol variation short period substantially the same as the long perk special display mode and a long reach variation period substantially the same as the long perk special display mode. Thereby, the long reach off special display mode is very similar to the long hit special display mode over time. In this way, by setting the long reach off special display mode to be a display mode that closely resembles the long display special display mode over time, the first special symbol lottery means 700 is displayed to the player until the middle symbol is stopped and displayed. It is possible to have a sense of expectation that a lottery will be won, and to suppress a decrease in interest.

  Note that “similarly over time” means that not only the variation mode displayed on the effect display device 115 but also the temporal display mode is very similar. That is, it means that the display mode after x seconds has passed is almost the same. “Extremely similar” means that the player cannot recognize the difference from the viewpoint of the player, and is a concept including “same”.

  The short reach out special display mode is a mode that is selected and determined when the lottery result by the second special symbol lottery means 710 is out, and there are a plurality of display patterns as shown in Tables 22 to 24 (see FIG. 46). It is stored in the display mode storage unit 830. Each of these display patterns corresponds to a special display mode per long. For example, in the table 7 (see FIG. 37) in which the special display mode per long is selected and determined, the variable number 75 “per normal length” is stored, and the table 22 (selecting and determining the special display mode out of short reach) is stored. In FIG. 46), “normal deviation (one symbol before)” of the variation number 73 corresponding to the variation number 75 and “normal deviation (after one symbol)” of the variation number 74 are stored.

  Moreover, the short reach off special display mode has a display mode that is very similar to a part of the special display mode per long time. Specifically, it has a symbol variation short period of the special display mode per long and a short reach variation period of the short reach off variation period of the first special symbol. In addition, the variation time of the short reach out special display mode is substantially the same as the variation time of the first special symbol out display mode. Thereby, reach can be generated without lengthening the fluctuation time. That is, in this embodiment, when the game ball wins the second start port 392 or the third start port 394, reach is always generated if the time-shortening function is not activated. Normally, when a reach occurs, it will be longer than the fluctuation time when the reach does not occur. Therefore, when reach is generated each time the game ball wins the second start port 392 or the third start port 394 when the time is not activated, the fluctuation time becomes long, the progress of the game is slowed, and the interest is lowered. Therefore, when the short reach out special display mode is displayed as the second special symbol display mode when the time is not activated, the display time of the first special symbol is set to the same variation time as the variation time of the out display mode. , It is possible to suppress a decrease in interest due to slow progress of the game.

  In addition, the short reach variation period of the short reach out-of-display mode of the first special symbol and the short reach variation period of the short reach out of the special display mode are substantially the same with time. The variation time of the short reach variation display mode of the first special symbol is longer than the variation time of the first special symbol variation variation display mode by the time required for the short reach variation period. Therefore, the variation time of the entire short reach off special display mode is shorter than the variation time of the short reach off display mode of the first special symbol by the time required for the short reach variation period.

  Further, in the present embodiment, the variation pattern of the decorative symbol 1153 in the short time special display mode of the second special symbol is the variation pattern of the first special symbol in that the left symbol and the right symbol are rotationally varied. This is clearly different from the variation of the decorative pattern 1153 in the display. Therefore, in the case of the short reach off special display mode, the player can grasp that the variation display of the decorative symbol 1153 starts and at the same time the variation of the second special symbol. Thus, in the case of the out-of-display mode, the short reach out-of-display mode, and the long reach out-of-display mode, it cannot be grasped that the mode is out during the fluctuation, so that a decrease in interest can be suppressed.

  That is, the occurrence of reach can also be achieved by setting the variation time in a display mode in which reach occurs (for example, short reach out-of-display mode) and the variation time in a display mode in which reach does not occur (eg, out-of-display mode) to substantially the same time. It can suppress that the progress of the game by becomes slow. However, in such a case, in the display mode in which the reach occurs, if the reach does not occur even after the time that the reach should occur, the reach no longer occurs (that is, a big hit). It will be understood during the change, and the interest will be reduced. Therefore, in addition to the lottery by the first special symbol lottery means 700 performed by winning the first starting opening 390, a lottery by the second special symbol lottery means 710 that always generates a reach at a predetermined time is provided. It is possible to suppress a decrease in interest due to the fact that the reach will not occur during the fluctuation. In particular, in the case of the present embodiment, the manner of variation in the symbol variation period of the first special symbol and the manner of variation in the symbol variation short period of the second special symbol are clearly different, so that no reach will occur. It is possible to suppress remarkably during the fluctuation.

  It should be noted that the display mode related to the fluctuation when the lottery result by the first special symbol lottery means 700 is short hit or small hit is related to the fluctuation when the lottery result by the second special symbol lottery means 710 is short hit or small hit. The variation mode is the same as the display mode.

[About sub-main processing]
Next, processing executed by the CPU 664 mounted on the peripheral control board 662 will be described. FIG. 57 is a flowchart illustrating an example of the sub-main process.

  As shown in FIG. 57, in the sub-main process, when power supply to the pachinko machine 1 is started, the peripheral control board 662 performs an initial setting process (step S310). In this initial setting process, a process of clearing the RAM 668 mounted on the peripheral control board 662 is performed. Note that interrupts are prohibited during the initial setting process, and interrupts are permitted after the initial setting process. When the initial setting process (step S310) ends, a loop process for monitoring whether or not the 16 ms elapsed flag T has been set is started (step S312).

  In this embodiment, the CPU 664 generates an interrupt every 2 ms and executes a 2 ms steady treatment. In the 2 ms steady process, a process of counting up the 16 ms progress monitoring counter (adding 1 to the 16 ms progress monitoring counter) is executed, and when the value of the 16 ms progress monitoring counter reaches 8, that is, when 16 ms elapses, 16 ms While the progress flag T is set, the 16 ms progress flag T is set (set) to “1” every 16 ms in the 2 ms steady process, and is normally set (reset) to “0”. If the 16 ms elapsed flag is set in step S312 (the 16 ms elapsed flag T is “1”), the 16 ms elapsed flag is reset (step S314), and then the 16 ms steady process is performed (step S316).

  In the 16 ms steady process, a process of controlling the effect display device 115 and the panel decoration lamp 690 and the like via the display device control board 116 and the lamp driving board 688 is executed based on the command received from the main control board 131, respectively. Is done. When the 16 ms steady process ends, the process returns to step S312 again, and each time the 16 ms elapsed flag T is set (that is, every 16 ms), the above-described steps S314 and S316 are repeated. On the other hand, when the 16 ms elapsed flag T is not set in step S312 (when the 16 ms elapsed flag T is “0”), loop processing is performed until the 16 ms elapsed flag T is set.

  FIG. 58 is a flowchart showing an example of a 16 ms steady process executed every 16 ms in the sub main process. In the 16 ms steady process, the CPU 664 executes the processes of steps S320 to S420. In the command analysis process in step S320, the command received from the main control board 131 is analyzed. In the effect control process in step S340, a control process related to the effect display device 115 is executed based on the effect command relating to the variation pattern received by the command receiving means 750.

  In the sound control process in step 360, a control process related to the speakers 18 and 57 for generating a sound effect (for example, BGM or sound) is executed. In this sound control process, a process of changing the BGM according to the gaming state or the mode of the effect displayed on the effect display device 115 is performed.

In the lamp control processing in step S380, control processing related to the panel decoration lamp 690 and the center decoration lamp 304 is performed. In the information output process in step S400, a command related to the variation pattern, a command related to the start winning to each start port 390, 392, 394 and other display commands are transmitted to the display device control board 116, and each lamp is turned on / off. A turn-off command is transmitted to the lamp driving board 688. In the random number update process of step S420, a process of updating random numbers used for various settings in the effect control process (step S340) is executed.

  In addition, the process of step S320-step S420 in a 16 ms regular process is complete | finished within 16 ms. Even if 16 ms or more is required from the start of the 16 ms steady process to the end of the 16 ms steady process, the 16 ms steady process starts immediately after the 16 ms has elapsed since the start of the 16 ms steady process (command in step S320). Do not execute from analysis processing. That is, when 16 ms elapses during execution of the 16 ms steady process, only the 16 ms elapse flag is set, and when it is determined in step S312 that the 16 ms elapse flag is set after the end of the 16 ms steady process, the 16 ms steady process is performed. To start.

  In this embodiment, the random number update process (step S330) is executed in the 16 ms steady process to update various random numbers. However, the timing (timing) for updating the various random numbers is limited to this. It is not a thing. For example, various random numbers may be updated in one or both of the loop processing in the sub-main processing and the 16 ms steady processing.

  FIG. 59 is a flowchart illustrating an example of command analysis processing. In the command analysis process, the CPU 664 first determines whether a command has been received from the main control board 131 (step S321). In this embodiment, when a command is received from the main control board 131, other processes such as a 16 ms steady process are interrupted to generate a command reception interrupt, and the received command is received by the RAM 668 mounted on the peripheral control board 662. Save in the receive command storage area. The received command storage area is stored in each area corresponding to the order in which the commands are received. Then, the contents of the reception command storage area are confirmed, and if the reception command is stored, the reception command having the reception order in the reception command storage area is read (step S322).

  It is determined whether or not the read received command is a start opening prize command (step S323), and if the read reception command is a start opening winning command (YES in step S323), it is determined whether or not it is a first start opening effective prize. (Step S324). If it is the first start opening effective winning (YES in step S324), the first starting opening effective winning flag is turned ON (step S325). Then, the command analysis process ends.

  If it is determined in step S324 that the first start opening is not valid (NO in step S324), it is determined whether or not the second / third start opening is valid (step S326). If there is (YES in step S326), the second and third starting opening valid winning flags are turned ON (step S327). Then, the command analysis process ends.

  Whether or not the first start opening valid winning is determined is whether or not the start opening winning command (see step S323) received from the main control board 131 is a command indicating that the first starting opening 390 has been won. When the start opening prize command received from the main control board 131 is a command indicating that the first start opening 390 has been won, it is stored by the first special symbol reservation number storage means 872 (see FIG. 57). This is when it is determined that the number of reserved first special symbols is less than the upper limit first predetermined number (4 in the present embodiment). That is, when a game ball is received at the first starting port 390, the command receiving means 750 determines whether or not the command receiving means 750 has been counted by the first special symbol hold counter 703 (that is, the count number by the first special symbol hold counter 703 is the first count). Regardless of whether or not the predetermined number has been reached, a command indicating that a game ball has been received (winned) is received at the first start port 390 transmitted from the main control board 131 (command transmission means 749). To do. At this time, if the number of first special symbol reservations stored in the first special symbol reservation number storage means 872 is less than the first predetermined number, the first special symbol reservation number storage means 872 stores the first special symbol reservation number storage means 872. 1 is added to the number of reserved special symbols, and the first start opening is awarded. On the other hand, if the number of first special symbol reservations stored in the first special symbol reservation number storage means 872 reaches the first predetermined number, the first special symbol reservation number storage means 872 stores the first special symbol reservation number storage means 872. Maintain the number of reserved special symbols (ie, do not add). At this time, even if a command indicating that the game ball has been received at the first start opening 390 is received, the first start opening effective winning is not achieved. Thus, the peripheral control board 662 (command receiving means 750) receives a command indicating that a game ball has won a prize at the first start opening 390 regardless of whether or not the first start opening is a valid winning. When the number of reserved special symbols stored in the first special symbol reserved number storage means 872 is less than the first predetermined number (that is, when 1 is added), the first start opening effective winning is achieved. When the number of reserved special symbols stored in the special symbol holding number storage means 872 has reached the first predetermined number (that is, if it is not added), there is no effective winning. Further, the counter value by the first special symbol hold counter 703 and the hold number by the first special symbol hold number storage means 872 are the same value.

  Similarly, the second and third starting opening valid winnings are the same as the first starting opening effective winnings, in which the starting opening winning command received from the main control board 131 (see step S323) is the second starting opening 392 or the third starting opening prize. This is a command indicating that a winning has been made at the start port 394, and means that the number of second special symbol reservations stored by the second special symbol reservation number storage means 874 (see FIG. 57) is added. That is, when a game ball is received at the second starting port 392 or the third starting port 394, the command receiving means 750 determines whether or not the command receiving means 750 has been counted by the second special symbol hold counter 713 (that is, the second special symbol hold counter 713). The second start port 392 or the third start port transmitted from the main control board 131 (command transmission means 749) regardless of whether the count number by the second control number reaches the second predetermined number (4 in the present embodiment). In 394, a command indicating that the game ball has been accepted (winned) is received. At this time, if the number of second special symbol reservations stored in the second special symbol reservation number storage means 874 is less than the second predetermined number, the second special symbol reservation number storage means 874 stores the second number. 1 is added to the number of reserved special symbols, and a second start opening effective winning is obtained. On the other hand, if the number of second special symbol reservations stored in the second special symbol reservation number storage means 874 reaches the second predetermined number, the second special symbol reservation number storage means 874 stores the second number. Maintain the number of reserved special symbols (ie, do not add). At this time, even if a command indicating that the game ball has been received by the second start port 392 or the third start port 394 is received, the second start port effective winning is not achieved. As described above, the peripheral control board 662 (command receiving means 750) indicates that the game ball has won the second start port 392 or the third start port 394 regardless of whether or not the second start port is effective. Receives the indicated command. Then, when the number of reserved special symbols stored in the second special symbol reserved number storage means 874 is less than the second predetermined number (that is, when 1 is added), the second start opening effective winning is achieved, and the second When the number of reserved special symbols stored in the special symbol reserved number storage means 874 reaches the second predetermined number (that is, when the number is not added), the prize is not valid. The counter value by the second special symbol hold counter 713 and the hold number by the second special symbol hold number storage means 874 are the same value.

  In step S323, if the received command is not a start opening prize command (NO in step S323), it is determined whether or not the command received in step S321 is an effect command (step S328). If the command received in step S321 is an effect command (YES in step S328), the fluctuation pattern reception flag is turned on (step S329), and the command analysis process is terminated. On the other hand, if the command received in step S321 is not an effect command (NO in step S328), the flag corresponding to the received command is turned ON (step S330), and the command analysis process is terminated.

  FIG. 60 is a flowchart illustrating an example of the effect control process. In the effect control process, the CPU 664 executes processes in steps S342 to S348.

  In the first, second, and third start opening effective winning memory processing of step S342, the first special symbol reservation number is stored based on the presence or absence of the effective winning at the first starting opening 390, and the second start opening 392 or the second start opening 392 is stored. Based on the presence / absence of an effective winning at the 3 start opening 394, the second special symbol holding number is stored and an effect process related to the 2nd and 3rd starting opening effective winning is executed. Details will be described later.

  In the decorative symbol variation start process in step S344, setting is performed to start the decorative symbol variation display if an effect command is received. Specifically, the variation pattern of the decorative symbol and the stop symbol are determined according to the effect command. Details will be described later.

  In the decorative symbol variation stop process of step S346, when a variation confirmation command is received from the main control board 131, a control command is transmitted to the display device control substrate 116 to confirm the decorative symbol variation display on the effect display device 115. I do.

  In the jackpot display process of step S348, in response to the jackpot start command transmitted from the main control board 131, a display indicating the start of the jackpot gaming state or a display during the jackpot gaming state (for example, round display or the like) on the effect display device 115. Control is performed.

  FIG. 61 is a flowchart showing an example of the first, second, and third starting opening valid winning memory processing. In the first, second, and third starting opening valid winning storage processing of FIG. 61, the CPU 664 first determines whether or not the first starting opening effective winning flag is ON (step S3421). That is, in step S325, if the first start opening valid winning flag is ON, it is determined that the first starting opening effective winning flag is ON. If the first start opening valid winning flag is ON (YES in step S3421), the first special symbol hold number is incremented by one (step S3422), and the first special symbol hold number display command, that is, the first special symbol is displayed. The number of reservations of the first special symbol stored in the number-of-holds storage unit 872 (see FIG. 29) is set (step S3423). Then, the first start port effective winning flag is turned OFF (step S3424).

  After turning off the first start opening effective winning flag in step S3424 or if the first starting opening effective winning flag is OFF in step S3421 (OFF in step S3421), then the second and third starting openings It is determined whether or not the winning flag is ON (step S3425). That is, in step S327, if the second and third start opening effective winning flags are ON, it is determined that the second and third starting opening effective winning flags are ON. If the second and third starting opening valid winning flags are ON (YES in step S3425), the second special symbol reservation number is incremented by one (step S3426), and the second special symbol reservation number display command, ie, the first The number of the second special symbol hold stored in the 2 special symbol hold number storage means 874 (see FIG. 25) is set (step S3427). Then, after performing the second and third starting port effective winning effect processing (step S3428), the second and third starting port effective winning flags are turned OFF (step S3429), and the first, second and third starting operations are performed. The mouth valid winning memory process is terminated. In step S3425, the first, second, and third start-port effective winning storage processes are also ended when the second / third start-port effective winning flag is OFF (NO in step S3425).

  Here, the second and third start opening effective winning effect processing in step S3428 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 62 is a flowchart showing an example of the second and third start opening effective winning effect processing.

  In the second and third start opening effective winning effect processing, first, it is determined whether or not the current gaming state is a time-saving gaming state (step S34281). If the current gaming state is not the short-time gaming state (YES in step S34281), it is determined whether or not the production point P is less than the upper limit of 10 points (step S34282). At this time, if the effect point P is less than 10 points (YES in step S34282), one point is further stored in the current effect point P (that is, one point is added or accumulated) (step S34283), The display of the production point P is set (step S34284). In the present embodiment, the gaming state that is not the short-time gaming state corresponds to a normal gaming state and a gaming state in which only the probability changing function is activated and the short-time function is not activated (for example, a gaming state after the end of the short game).

  By the way, as described above, in the gaming state that is not the short-time gaming state, the game ball is more likely to win the first starting port 390 than the second starting port 392 and the third starting port 394, while in the short-time gaming state, It becomes easier for the game ball to win the third start port 394 than the first start port 390. If the current gaming state is the short-time gaming state, the effect point P is not stored even if a game ball wins the second starting port 392 and the third starting port 394 (NO in step S34281). . This is a privilege for winning at a starting opening where it is difficult for a game ball to win as will be described later, if the stage point P is to be given until winning at the second starting opening 392 and the third starting opening 394 in such a short gaming state. This is because the meaning of the production point P is lost.

  The production point P is a point stored in response to the winning of a game ball at the second start port 392 or the third start port 394. In the present embodiment, 1 point is stored each time one game ball wins in the second start port 392 or the third start port 394. That is, the production point P is a quantitative representation of the expected value for displaying the special production. In other words, every time a game ball wins in the second starting port 392 or the third starting port 394, the effect point P is incremented by one, and the effect point P after storage is a predetermined upper limit value (this implementation) In the form, it is possible to store up to 10 points).

  Here, the special effect is composed of a special first effect and a special second effect, and corresponds to the special effect game mode in the present invention. The special first effect is an effect that is displayed on the effect display device 115 when the effect point P reaches 10 points, and the special second effect is the basis for storing 10 points of the effect points P (in other words, This is an effect that is displayed at the timing when the variation display of the second and third start opening effective winnings is performed. In other words, the special second effect is special at the timing when the variation pattern based on the second and third start opening effective winnings is displayed when the effect point P becomes 10 points due to the second and third starting opening effective winnings. This is to produce a production. Therefore, when the second and third start opening valid winnings are made, the number of holds by the first special symbol reservation number storage means 872 or the second special symbol reservation number storage means 874 is 1 or more and the production point P is 10 points. The special first effect is displayed immediately when the effect point P reaches 10 points, while the special second effect is held when the second and third start opening valid winnings are made. It is displayed after the change display that has been performed ends. As a result, when the effect command received in step S3201 is stored in the received command storage area at the time when 10 effect points P are stored, it is received earlier. While the variable display related to the effect command is being performed, the special first effect is continuously performed.

  After setting the display of the production point P in step S34284, it is determined whether or not 10 production points P have been stored (step S34285). Here, if 10 points of effect points P are stored (YES in step S34285), the second special symbol hold number is set in the effect hold counter (step S34286), and the special first effect flag is turned ON (step S34286). Step S34287), the second and third start opening effective winning effect processing is terminated.

  In step S34286, the second special symbol holding number is set in the production hold counter when the second and third starting opening effective winnings are displayed in a variable manner based on which 10 production points P are stored. This is to perform the special second effect.

  Further, when it is determined in step S34281 that the game is in the short-time gaming state (NO in step S34281), when it is determined in step S34282 that the effect point P is 10 (NO in step S34282), the effect point P in step S34285. When it is determined that the value is not 10 (NO in step S34285), the second and third starting opening effective winning effect processing is ended.

[Decoration pattern change start processing]
Next, a decorative symbol variation start process and a process executed in the process will be described with reference to FIGS.

  FIG. 63 is a flowchart illustrating an example of the decorative symbol variation start process. FIG. 64 is a flowchart showing an example of the special effect lottery process in the decorative symbol variation start process. FIG. 65 is a diagram illustrating an example of a table for determining whether or not to execute the effect point storage process. In the present embodiment, in addition to the aspect in which one effect point P is added according to the fact that the second and third start opening effective winning flags are ON (see step S34283), the effect point P is also included in the decorative symbol variation start process. May be added.

  In the decorative symbol variation start process of FIG. 63, the CPU 664 first determines whether or not the variation pattern reception flag is ON (step S3441). If the variation pattern reception flag is ON (YES in step S3441), it is determined whether or not the time-saving gaming state is set (step S3442).

  If it is determined in step S3442 that the game is not in the short-time gaming state (YES in step S3442), a special effect lottery process is performed (step S3443), and it is determined whether or not the variation pattern related to the effect command received in step S321 is a winning variation pattern. It is determined (step S3444).

  On the other hand, if it is determined in step S3442 that the game is in the short-time gaming state (NO in step S3442), the special effect lottery process is omitted and the process proceeds to step S3444. Details of the special effect lottery process will be described later. As described above, during the short-time gaming state, even if a game ball wins at the second starting port 392 and the third starting port 394, the effect point P is not stored, so in step S3442, if the short-time gaming state is present, A special effect lottery process for performing various effects related to the effect point P is omitted. In addition, during the short-time gaming state, not only the production point P is stored but also the storage status of the production point P is not displayed. Thereby, even if a game ball wins in the 2nd starting port 392, the fall of the interest by not having the production point P stored can be suppressed.

  If it is determined in step S3444 that the pattern is a winning variation pattern (YES in step S3444), a corresponding winning stop symbol determining process is performed (step S3445). In this stop symbol determination process, if it is a long hit, it is determined whether or not the probability variation jackpot flag is set. If the jackpot flag is not set, the stop symbol for the non-probable variable symbol is always determined. If it is a short hit or a small hit, the stop symbol for short hit / small hit is determined. On the other hand, if it is determined that the variation pattern is a deviation (NO in step S3444), a stop symbol of the deviation symbol is determined (step S3446).

  When the stop symbol is determined in step S3445 or step S3446, the received variation pattern is set (step S3447). This variation pattern determination and A mode setting processing will be described later. Subsequently, the fluctuation pattern reception flag is turned off (step S3448). Thereafter, it is determined whether or not the production hold counter is 0 (step S3449). If the production hold counter is not 0 (YES in step S3449), the fluctuation display (that is, the fluctuation display started from now) is the first. 2. It is determined whether or not the variation is based on the third start opening effective winning (step S3450).

  In step S3450, if the change display to be started is a change based on the second and third start opening effective winnings (YES in step S3450), one is subtracted from the effect suspension counter (step S3451), and the decorative symbol change is made. End the start process.

On the other hand, when it is determined in step S3449 that the production hold counter is 0 (NO in step S3449), and when it is determined in step S3450 that the variation is based on the first start opening effective winning (step S3450). NO in
Finishes the decorative symbol variation start process without performing the subtraction process (step S3451) of the effect suspension counter.

  If the variation pattern reception flag is OFF in step S3441 (NO in step S3441), the decorative symbol variation start process is terminated as it is.

[Special production lottery processing]
In the special effect lottery process of FIG. 64, the CPU 664 first determines whether or not the effect hold counter is 1 (step S34431). Here, if it is determined that the production hold counter is not 1 (YES in step S34431), whether or not the production point is greater than 6 points and less than 10 points, that is, 7 points or more and 9 points or less. It is determined whether or not (step S34432). If the production hold counter is greater than 1, the production points are 10 points. If the production hold counter is 0, the production points are less than 10.

  If it is determined in step S34432 that the effect point P is greater than 6 points and less than 10 points (YES in step S34432), it is determined whether or not a special effect condition is satisfied (step S34433). On the other hand, when the production point P is within the range of 0 to 6 points (including 0 points and 6 points) or 10 points (NO in step S34432), the special production conditions are satisfied. The special effect lottery process is terminated without determining whether or not there is. That is, if the production point reaches 10 points, the second special symbol hold counter 713 that triggered the 10 points is counted (second special symbol hold by the second special symbol hold number storage means 874). In the variable display performed before the variable display based on the special effect lottery process is terminated without determining whether or not the special effect condition is satisfied. As a result, the special effect in the variable display based on the count by the second special symbol hold counter 713 (holding the second special symbol by the second special symbol hold number storage means 874) that triggered the 10 points wasted. Therefore, it is possible to continue to give the player a sense of expectation over a plurality of variable displays.

  Note that the special effect condition is that the effect command received in step S321 is a specific variation pattern, and the effect point P storage performed in response to the effect command received in step S321 is a specific variation pattern. Winning a lottery. In the present embodiment, when the lottery result by the first special symbol lottery means 700 or the second special symbol lottery means 710 is a long hit, or when it is out of reach, the effect point P storage lottery is performed. . Specifically, as shown in FIG. 65, in the case of variation numbers 11 to 21, 25 to 28, 32 to 35, 39 to 42, and 76 to 86, the effect point P storage lottery is performed. At this time, the probability of winning the effect point P storage lottery is set to, for example, one half as shown in FIG.

  In this way, the effect point is equal to or greater than the predetermined threshold (7 points in the present embodiment) and the effect command received in step S321 is a specific variation pattern (that is, the first special symbol image display control means 851 or the second When the special symbol image display control means 852 is a specific fluctuation pattern, the special effect condition is established selectively (that is, when the effect point P storage lottery is won). Therefore, the production points are stored based on the winning of the game ball at the second start opening 392, and the special production conditions are established and the production points are 10 points rather than the accumulated production points reaching 10 points. Less frequently.

  When the special effect condition is satisfied in step S34433 (YES in step S34433), effect point P storage processing is performed (step S34444).

  In the effect point P storage process (step S34444), the storage process is performed so that the effect point P after the storage becomes the upper limit of 10 points. That is, if the production point P before storage is 7 points, 3 points are stored, if the production point P before storage is 8 points, 2 points are stored, and if the production point P before storage is 9 points, 1 point is stored. Stored. In other words, when the above-mentioned special effect condition is satisfied, the quantity necessary for the effect point P to reach a predetermined upper limit (10 points in the present embodiment) is added, and the effect point P after storage is the predetermined value. Increase to the upper limit of.

  Then, after the effect point storage process (step S34444) is performed, the special first effect flag and the special second effect flag are turned ON (step S34445), and the special effect lottery process is terminated.

  When it is determined in step S34432 that the effect point is less than 7 points or 10 points (NO in step S34432), and when it is determined in step S34433 that the special effect condition is not satisfied (NO in step S34433). ), The special effect lottery process is terminated.

  On the other hand, when it is determined in step S34431 that the production hold counter is 1 (NO in step S34431), the variation display (that is, the variation display started from now on) is a variation based on the second and third start opening effective winnings. It is determined whether or not (step S34446). Here, if it is determined that the variation display is variation based on the second and third start opening valid winnings (YES in step S34446), the special second effect flag is turned on (step S34447) and the effect hold counter is reset. (Step S34448). When the change display is a change based on the first start opening valid winning in step S34446 (NO in step S34446), the special effect lottery process is terminated.

  In this way, in the special effect lottery process of FIG. 64, when the effect hold counter is 1 (YES in S34431), since the effect points P are stored up to 10 points, the effect points P reach 10 points. When the variable display is performed based on the second and third valid winnings that have been triggered (YES in S34446), the flag for performing the special second effect is set to ON and the effect hold counter is reset (S34447). And S34448).

  On the other hand, even if the production hold counter is 0 (that is, when production point P is not stored up to 10 points) (NO in S34431), production point P may be greater than 6 points and less than 10 points. (YES in S34432) when the special performance condition is satisfied based on the first, second, and third effective winnings (that is, when a variable display based on a predetermined length or reach is made) (YES in S34433) ) In order to perform the special first effect and the special second effect, the effect points P are stored up to the upper limit value, and the special effect flag is set to ON (S34444 and S34445).

  Further, when the production hold counter is 2 or more (that is, production points P are stored up to 10 points, but before the second and third effective winnings that triggered the production point P to 10 points) If the first, second, and third effective winnings are held and the variable display based on the previously held effective winnings is not yet performed) (YES in S34431), the production point P Is 10 points (NO in S34432), each special effect flag remains OFF without being set ON. Then, when the variation display is made for all of the other first, second, and third effective winnings that are already held, the effect holding counter becomes 1 (NO in S34431), and the effect point P reaches 10 points. In response to the change display based on the second and third effective winnings, the special second effect is set to ON (YES in S34436 to S34448).

  In other words, the second and third effective prizes that triggered the production point P to 10 points until all of the other first, second and third valid prizes already held are displayed in a variable manner. The change display based on and the execution of the special second effect corresponding thereto are reserved (standby). Therefore, as described above, when the production point P reaches 10 points, the special first production is performed (S34287 in FIG. 62), and when the production point P is stored up to 10 points, other effective winnings are already put on hold. If it is, the special second effect is not executed until all the other active winnings that have been put on hold are variably displayed (so-called hold-up), so the display of the special first effect and the display of the special second effect There will be a time difference. As a result, only the special first effect is displayed over a plurality of variable displays until all the previous holds are consumed, so that the player can obtain the effect point P by the special first effect. It is possible to accurately confirm with a margin that the upper limit has been reached and to play with a sense of expectation until the special second performance is executed, so that it is possible to suppress a decrease in interest.

  Furthermore, when the production points P are stored up to 10 points based on the second and third effective winnings, if other first, second and third effective winnings are already held, they will be held ahead. Even when the special effect condition is satisfied based on the valid winnings made (that is, when a variable display based on a predetermined length or reach is made), the storage of the effect point P and the ON setting of the special effect flag are not performed. Not executed. Therefore, even if the previously held effective prize establishes the special effect condition, the special second effect is not performed based on the previously held effective prize but the effect point P is 10 points. It is executed based on the second and third effective winnings that triggered the event. As a result, only the special first effect is displayed over a plurality of variable displays until all the previous holds are consumed, so that the player can obtain the effect point P by the special first effect. It is possible to accurately confirm with a margin that the upper limit has been reached and to play with a sense of expectation until the special second performance is executed, so that it is possible to suppress a decrease in interest.

  As described above, when the effect point P storage lottery is won, regardless of whether the effective winning point from which the effect point P storage lottery is performed is the first start opening effective winning or the second / third starting opening effective winning. Special effects are performed. On the other hand, when the special effect is performed because the effect point P reaches 10 points without performing the effect point P storage lottery, the special effect is performed only when the effective winning is the second and third starting opening effective winnings. Is done.

  In addition, when the special first effect and the special second effect are performed, when the effect point P storage lottery is won, both effects are displayed in the same variation, whereas the effect point P storage lottery is performed. If the special effect is performed because the effect point P has reached 10 points, the first special symbol hold number storage means 872 and the second special symbol hold number storage means when the effect point P reaches 10 points. Depending on the number of holds held by 874, both effects are not always displayed in the same variation. Specifically, when the production point P reaches 10 points, the display of the special first production is started, and the variable display based on the second and third effective winnings that triggered the production point P to 10 points. When it is performed, the special second effect is started.

  As described above, in the present embodiment, the effect point P is stored (added) in response to the fact that the second / third start opening valid winning flag is ON or the effect point P storage lottery is won. When the point P reaches the upper limit value, the special effect flag (the special first effect flag and / or the special second effect flag) is turned on, but the present invention is not limited to this. For example, according to the fact that the second and third start opening valid winning flags are ON or the winning of the production point P storage lottery, the puzzles are combined, and when this puzzle is completed, the special production flag is set. It may be. In addition, a plurality of predetermined missions are cleared one by one in response to the fact that the second and third start opening valid winning flags are set or the stage point P storage lottery is won, and all the predetermined missions are cleared. The special effect flag may be turned on when the is cleared. That is, a condition for setting the special effect flag is set, and this condition is cleared when the second and third start opening effective winning flags are ON or when the effect point P storage lottery is won. Any configuration may be used as long as it approaches the direction in which it is performed.

  In the present embodiment, the lottery result is derived by the variable display by the first special symbol lottery means 700 or the second special symbol lottery means 710, and the special effect is displayed separately from the variable display. Not limited to this. For example, you may make it derive | lead-out the lottery result by the 1st special symbol lottery means 700 or the 2nd special symbol lottery means 710 by special production.

[About the storage display mode of production points]
Next, an aspect in which the effect points P are stored and displayed on the effect display device 115 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 66 is a front view of the center object for explaining the storage display mode of the effect points and the floating operation of the floating body.

  As shown in FIG. 66, the effect display device 115 visible from the opening 301 of the center accessory 300 has an effect point display area 1154. In the effect point display area 1154, an effect point 1 display unit 1154a to an effect point 10 display unit 1154j composed of 10 frames are displayed, and the display color in the frame changes every time the effect point P is stored. . Therefore, the player refers to the effect point display area 1154, so that both the achievement upper limit, which is the maximum value at which the effect points P can be stored, and the progress status, which is the accumulated value of the currently stored effect points P, are displayed. It is possible to grasp at the same time. For example, when the production point P is 0, all the frames of the 10 display units are displayed in the same color as the background color.

  In the effect point display area 1154, the effect points P are stored and displayed one by one as the game ball wins the second start port 392 or the third start port 394, but the second special symbol holding number memory is stored. Regardless of the number of reservations of the means 874 and the maximum number of reservations (four in this case), up to ten effect points P can be stored and displayed.

  First, a description will be given of the storage display mode of the effect points P performed in response to the second / third start opening valid winning flag being ON.

  When the game ball wins the first start opening 390, the hold display area 1150 is displayed in a third display mode indicating that it is held by the first special symbol hold counter 703. On the other hand, the display colors are all maintained in the frames of the effect point 1 display unit 1154a to the effect point 10 display unit 1154j. This indicates that the production point P is maintained at 0.

  When the game ball is effectively won at the second start port 392 or the third start port 394, the hold display area 1150 adds the hold number by the second special symbol hold counter 713 to display the second display mode, The display color in the frame of the effect point 1 display unit 1154a changes. Note that the display colors in the frames of the effect point 2 display unit 1154b to the effect point 10 display unit 1154j are maintained. Thereby, the player can grasp that the production point P is 1.

  As described above, when the game ball wins the second start port 392 or the third start port 394, the effect points P are stored one by one, and the stored effect points P are displayed with an indicator. On the other hand, when the game ball wins the first start port 390, the effect points P are not stored. That is, when the game ball wins at the second start port 392 or the third start port 394, the effect point P for displaying a predetermined special effect is stored. The stored effect points P are indicators that can be visually recognized by the player in the effect point display area 1154, and are stored and displayed in a manner approaching the predetermined achievement upper limit.

  Therefore, the player can confirm the remaining number of points necessary until a predetermined special effect, and can visually confirm that the player has won the second starting port 392 or the third starting port 394. That is, when a player wins a game ball to the second start port 392 or the third start port 394, the winning is not only an opportunity for internal processing such as a win determination or a variable display, but the player himself / herself plays a game ball. Since it is possible to visually grasp the production point P that has been won and stored, it is possible to maintain the player's expectation and sense of security.

  Further, since the game balls are less likely to win the second starting port 392 or the third starting port 394 than the first starting port 390 (except for the short-time gaming state), the second starting port 392 or the third starting port. When the game ball is won in 394, the production point P is stored as a privilege for the player. Thereby, it is possible to improve a sense of expectation when the game ball is won at the second start port 392 or the third start port 394, which is difficult to win.

  The display of the effect point display area 1154 is based on the storage status of the effect points P (progress status for performing the special effect) according to the winning of the game balls to the start openings 390, 392, and 394. It may be displayed up to a predetermined achievement upper limit. Therefore, when the game ball wins the first start opening 390, the effect point P may be increased, or the effect point P may be increased even if it is not reserved by the special symbol reservation number storage means 872, 874. Also good.

  When the effect point P is 9 points, the display colors in the frames of the effect point 1 display unit 1154a to the effect point 9 display unit 1154i are changed, and only the effect point 10 display unit 1154j is the display color in the frame. Is the same color as the background color. At this time, when the game ball is effectively won at the second start port 392 or the third start port 394, the display color within the frame of the effect point 10 display unit 1154j changes as shown in FIG. Thereby, the player can grasp that the production point P has reached the upper limit of 10 points. In the hold display area 1150, the number of holds by the second special symbol hold counter 713 is displayed in a stored state.

  When the effect point P reaches 10 points, a character appears above the effect point display area 1154. Then, the character is displayed above the effect point display area 1154 until the on-hold variation display based on the effective winning at the second start port 392 or the third start port 394 that causes the effect point P to reach 10 points. Continue dancing. In addition, while the character continues to dance above the effect point display area 1154, the display colors in the frames of the effect point 1 display unit 1154a to the effect point 10 display unit 1154j are changed. That is, the special effect has not yet been displayed until the on-hold variable display based on the effective winnings at the second start port 392 or the third start port 394 that causes the effect point P to reach 10 points. Nevertheless, the display of the derivation progress status (ie, the number of effect points) for deriving the special effect is continued. In other words, even when the production point P reaches 10 points, even if the counter value by the second special symbol hold counter 713 is 1 or more (that is, stored by the second special symbol hold number storage means 874). Even if the number of holdings of the second special symbol is 1 or more), the display of the number of effect points is maintained and the variable display based on the counter value (the holding) is performed. Thereby, the game is straddled across a plurality of variable displays until the variable display of the hold based on the effective winning at the second start port 392 or the third start port 394 that causes the production point P to reach 10 points. It is possible to continue to give a sense of expectation to the person, and the decline in interest can be suppressed.

  Then, when the on-hold variation display based on the effective winning at the second start port 392 or the third start port 394 that triggered the effect point P to 10 points is started, the dance is performed above the effect point display area 1154. After the character that has been moved moves to substantially the center of the effect display device 115 and is enlarged and displayed, the display of the character disappears and the floating body Z that is substantially the same as the character appears by the floating body driving device 20. Floating operation. A series of effects by such a character corresponds to the special effects of the present embodiment.

  In the present embodiment, the aspect in which the character continues to dance above the effect point display area 1154 corresponds to the special first effect, and the character dancing above the effect point display area 1154 is substantially at the center of the effect display device 115. A mode in which the floating body Z is floated by the floating body driving device 20 after the enlarged display corresponds to the special second effect. Therefore, the special first effect is displayed immediately regardless of the number of holds when the effect point P reaches 10 points by the effective winning at the second start port 392 or the third start port 394. On the other hand, the special second effect is effective for the second start port 392 or the third start port 394 when the effect point P reaches 10 points by the effective winning at the second start port 392 or the third start port 394. If a valid winning is held in addition to the winning, it will be displayed after the variable display based on the holding is completed.

  Thus, when the production point P is stored up to a predetermined upper limit value (here, 10 points) due to the effective winning at the second start port 392 or the third start port 394, the production point P is a predetermined achievement upper limit. Since the special first effect that solicits the fact that the player has reached is displayed, the player can easily grasp that the special effect has been obtained, and can maintain the interest of the game. Furthermore, since the special 2nd effect which is the special production privilege regarding derivation | leading-out of a lottery result is performed based on the achievement point P having reached the predetermined achievement upper limit, the fall of interest can be suppressed.

  Then, when both the special first effect and the special second effect are finished, that is, the suspension based on the effective winning at the second start port 392 or the third start port 394 that causes the effect point P to reach 10 points. When the variable display is finished, the effect point P is reset to 0, and the effect point P is displayed in the effect point display area 1154 in a mode where it is 0.

  In the present embodiment, the effect point P is also reset when a jackpot game (more specifically, a long game) is started, and the storage of the effect points P is started from 0 after the jackpot game ends. As a result, with the jackpot game as an opportunity, the player can enter the game with a new feeling. In addition, during the jackpot game, even if a game ball wins the second starting port 392, the effect points are not stored, and therefore the storage status of the effect points is not displayed. Accordingly, since the newly displayed effect points after the jackpot game ends are 0, the player can renew the mood and restart the game after the jackpot game ends.

  Next, the storage display mode of the production point P performed in response to winning the production point P storage lottery will be described.

  When the game ball is effectively won at the first start opening 390, the hold display area 1150 displays the number of holds by the first special symbol hold counter 703 (the number of holds by the first special symbol hold number storage means 872). Is done. Note that when the game ball effectively wins the first start opening 390, the CPU 664 receives an effect command from the main control board 131 and the variation pattern reception flag is turned on (see step S329 in FIG. 59). If the special effect condition is satisfied, effect point P storage processing (see step S34444 in FIG. 64) is performed. Here, the special effect condition is an effect point P performed in response to the effect command received in step S321 being a specific variation pattern and the effect command received in step S321 being a specific variation pattern. Winning the storage lottery. In addition, it is a precondition for special production conditions to be satisfied that a production point is more than a predetermined threshold (7 points in this embodiment) and less than an achievement upper limit (10 points).

  Here, “greater than or equal to a predetermined threshold value” means a value that reaches a predetermined achievement upper limit value when a game ball is slightly awarded to the second start port 392. In the present embodiment, since the achievement upper limit value is 10 points, a value that reaches the achievement upper limit value, that is, 7 points becomes a predetermined threshold value when about 3 game balls win the second starting port 392. Further, when the predetermined achievement upper limit is, for example, 100 points, a value that reaches the achievement upper limit when 3 to 5 game balls win the second starting port 392, that is, about 5 to 7 points is predetermined. It becomes a threshold value. In other words, if the difference between the stored performance points and the predetermined achievement upper limit is too large, the player plays the game thinking that the predetermined achievement upper limit is not reached, but in a short time When the predetermined achievement upper limit is reached, attention is drawn to the winning of the game ball at the second start port 392, and interest is drawn to the trend of the game ball. At this time, it is usual to feel that the predetermined achievement upper limit is not reached only by winning one ball at the second starting port 392, but at this time, the production points are stored together such as 2 points or 3 points. Thus, it is possible to give a surprise to the player, thereby giving a great sense of expectation to the player and suppressing a decrease in interest.

  In the effect point P storage process, when the change display of the hold based on the winning to the first start port 390 that is the basis for the effect point P storage process is started, the effect point P is set to 10 points that is the upper limit value. In addition to being stored and displayed, a special first effect is performed. In the same variable display, the special second effect is performed following the special first effect. In addition, the display of the effect point P in the effect point display area 1154 is displayed up to the special second effect that is the final aspect as the effect privilege.

  Thus, even when the production point P is not stored up to a predetermined upper limit value (here, 10 points), the production point P is equal to or greater than the predetermined value (here, 7 points), and When the special effect condition is satisfied (that is, when a variable display based on a predetermined length or reach is made), the effect point P for displaying the predetermined special effect is stored. . In other words, even if the difference between the stored production point P and the predetermined upper limit value (here, 10 points) is 2 or more, the special production condition is satisfied as long as the difference is within a small difference range of 3 or less. If is established, it means that the production point P is stored. The stored effect points P are indicators that can be visually recognized by the player in the effect point display area 1154, and are stored and displayed in a manner approaching the predetermined achievement upper limit.

  Therefore, the player can confirm the remaining number of points necessary until a predetermined special performance, and that the special performance condition is established based on the winning of the game ball to the start opening 390, 392, 394. I can confirm. And the special 1st production which teaches that the production | presentation point P has reached the predetermined achievement upper limit, and the special 2nd production which is a special production privilege regarding derivation | leading-out of a lottery result are displayed as a series of special productions. Therefore, the player can have a sense of expectation to obtain a privilege of a series of special effects (first special effect and special second effect) even if the effect points P are not stored up to a predetermined upper limit value. Can maintain and improve the interests of

  In addition, regarding the effect point P storage process performed in response to winning of the effect point P storage lottery, in the present embodiment, the effect command received based on the fact that the game ball has won the first start port 390 is specified. Although the effect point P storage lottery is performed when the effect command indicates the fluctuation pattern, the present invention is not limited to this. For example, when the effect command based on the fact that the game ball is effectively won at the second start port 392 or the third start port 394 is a command indicating a specific variation pattern, the effect point P is always performed without performing the effect point P storage lottery. You may make it perform a storage process.

  In addition, when the lottery result by the first special symbol lottery means 700 or the second special symbol lottery means 710 is short hit or small hit, the floating body drive device in the gaming state after the short hit game or the small hit game is executed An effect using the floating body Z by 20 is performed. The effect using the floating body Z by the floating body driving device 20 is not always performed immediately after the short hit game or the small hit game ends. Therefore, when the production point P becomes 10 points between the end of the short hit game or the small hit game and the production using the floating body Z by the floating body driving device 20, or the production point Even if the P storage lottery is won, a special effect is performed.

  As described above, when the production point P reaches 10 points, until the variation display based on the hold by the second special symbol reservation number storage means 874 that triggered the production point P to 10 points, is performed. Display of special effects is put on hold.

  In this way, the change display based on the hold by the second special symbol hold number storage means 874 that triggered the effect point P to 10 points is managed by the effect hold count means 855. Specifically, when the production point P reaches 10 points, the number of second special symbols stored in the second special symbol storage unit 874 (see FIG. 25) at this time is used as the production reservation counter value. Remember. Then, every time the variable display is performed by the second special symbol image display control means 852 (see FIG. 25), it is decremented by one from the effect suspension counter value. When the production hold counter value becomes 1, the variable display based on the hold of the second special symbol stored in the second special symbol hold number storage means 874 that triggered the production point P to 10 points is performed. And the second special effect is displayed. The first special effect is performed when the effect point P reaches 10 points.

[About game effects]
Next, among the game effect modes (including the variation mode of the decorative symbol 1153) executed in the pachinko machine 1 of the present embodiment, the effect performed by the floating body driving device 20 will be described with reference to the drawings. explain. In addition, the “game effect mode” refers to an effect by the effect display device 115 (including a variation mode of the decorative symbol 1153), an effect by the floating body driving device 20, sounds such as sound effects output from the speakers 18 and 57, This is a concept including various effects such as opening / closing operations of the jackpot gaming opening / closing device 400, which are executed according to the gaming state.

[About stage transition benefits]
First, in the pachinko machine 1 of the present embodiment, when the effect point P reaches 10 points in the effect point display area 1154, an effect of selecting and determining one of the planet stages is performed. The “stage transition privilege mode” will be described with reference to FIGS. 67 and 68. FIG. 67 and FIG. 68 are front views showing aspects displayed on the effect display device when executing the “stage transition privilege aspect”. In FIGS. 67 and 68, the floating body Z that is floatingly operated by the floating body driving device 20 is also shown redundantly in the effect display device 115.

  In addition, the following "stage transition privilege mode" shall be performed in the case of the variable display based on the holding | maintenance that the production point P triggered 10 points. In addition, the “stage transition privilege mode” is awarded when the stage point P reaches 10 points when winning at the second start port 392 or the third start port 394, and when the stage point P storage lottery is won. When the number of points reaches 10 points, it is executed in common in either case. Here, the “stage transition privilege mode” executed when winning the second start port 392 or the third start port 394 and the production point P reaches 10 points will be described as an example.

  First, as shown in FIG. 67A, in the effect display device 115, in the hold display area 1150 (the first hold display area 1151 and the second hold display area 1152), the first hold storage display section 1151a, The third display mode is displayed on the third hold memory display unit 1151c and the fourth hold memory display unit 1151d, the second display mode is displayed on the second hold memory display unit 1151b, and the fifth hold memory is displayed. The first display mode is displayed on the display unit 1152a, indicating that there are a total of four holds. Also, in the effect point display area 1154, the effect point P is displayed on the effect point 1 display unit 1154a to the effect point 9 display unit 1154i, indicating that 9 effect points P are stored. Further, the decorative symbol 1153 (the left symbol column 1153a, the middle symbol column 1153b, the right symbol column 1153c) is being displayed in a variable manner.

  Here, when a game ball wins the second start port 392 or the third start port 394 in the state shown in FIG. 67 (A), as shown in FIG. 67 (B), the effect display device 115 has a hold display area 1150. Then, the number of holdings by the second special symbol holding counter 713 is added. Here, instead of the first display mode, the second display mode is displayed on the fifth hold storage display unit 1152a, and the first display mode is displayed on the sixth hold storage display unit 1152b. At the same time, in the effect point display area 1154, the effect point P is displayed on the effect point 10 display unit 1154j, indicating that the effect point P has reached 10 points.

  When the effect point P reaches 10 points, the above-described “first special effect” is executed in the effect display device 115 (specifically, the common symbol display area 115c). That is, as shown in FIG. 67 (B), after the light emission is displayed above the effect point display area 1154, as shown in FIG. 67 (C), the character (in this case, UFO) is selected from the light emission display. An effect that appears is displayed. Furthermore, as shown in FIG. 67 (D), the character appearing above the effect point display area 1154 indicates a hold storage display section (in this case, the fifth storage) indicating the hold that caused the effect point P to reach 10 points. Are stopped and displayed after moving to the upper part of the reserved storage display portion 1152a). When the symbol variation of the decorative symbol 1153 is completed, the decorative symbol 1153 is stopped and displayed as usual, as shown in FIG. 67 (E).

  With the “first special effect” shown in FIGS. 67 (B) to (D), the player can grasp that 10 points of the effect points P have been stored, and the “second special effect” to be executed subsequently. The game will be continued with expectation. Furthermore, it is possible to specify the hold that triggers the effect point P to 10 points, and the player can grasp the execution timing of the “second special effect”.

  In addition, in the effect display device 115, the variation display of the decorative symbol 1153 (so-called “holding digestion”) is sequentially executed based on the hold prior to the hold when the effect point P reaches 10 points. Thus, the hold display in the hold display area 1150 is shifted and displayed on the previous hold storage display section. Specifically, from the state shown in FIG. 67 (E), when the variation display of the decorative design 1153 is sequentially executed based on the four holds, as shown in FIG. 67 (F), the production point P becomes 10 points. The hold (that is, the second display mode in the fifth hold storage display unit 1152a) that is the trigger to reach is shifted and displayed as the second display mode in the first hold storage display unit 1151a. Along with this, the character displayed above the hold where the production point P reaches 10 points also moves in accordance with the shift display of each hold in the hold display area 1150. Therefore, FIG. As shown, the character is displayed above the first reserved storage display portion 1151a. In this way, the display position of the character also moves in accordance with the hold display that triggered the production point P to 10 points. Therefore, even if the variation display (holding digestion) of the decorative symbols 1153 based on each hold is sequentially performed. , It is always possible to specify the hold that triggered the production point P to 10 points.

  Then, as shown in FIG. 67 (G), in the effect display device 115, the decoration symbol 1153 is based on the hold immediately before the hold (that is, the hold immediately before) when the effect point P reaches 10 points. When the change display of is finished, the decorative symbol 1153 is displayed in a variable manner on the basis of the hold (that is, the second display mode in the first hold storage display unit 1151a) when the effect point P reaches 10 points. Done. At this time, effects as shown in FIG. 67 (H) and FIGS. 68 (A) to (D) are executed as the above-mentioned “second special effect”. A series of “first special effect” and “second special effect” in the “stage transition privilege mode” is referred to as a “stage lottery effect”.

First, as shown in FIG. 67 (H), in the effect display device 115, the holding of the effect point P reaches 10 points (that is, the second display mode in the first hold storage display unit 1151a). The character displayed above moves to the substantially central portion of the effect display device 115 and is gradually enlarged and displayed. At the same time, the flying sound that gradually increases the volume from the speakers 18 and 57 is output, so that the character located far away gradually approaches the near side, and the character appears as if from the effect display device 115. Produce an impression that pops out to the front. Such an effect that strikes the player's intentions surprises the player as “Ah!” And also has a strong interest in the development of the subsequent effects.

  When the character effect shown in FIG. 67 (H) is executed, the effect point P stored and displayed in the effect point display area 1154 is reset from 10 points to 0 points. Thereby, the player can grasp | ascertain reliably that the production | presentation privilege based on 10 points of production | generation points P having been stored was provided. Further, when the “second special effect” is executed, the decorative symbol 1153 is reduced and displayed in the upper right part of the common symbol display area 115c in a front view, and the variable display is continued. Therefore, even when the “second special effect” is executed, the player can visually recognize the decorative symbol 1153 and its variation, and the symbol variation of the decorative symbol 1153 based on the hold cannot be visually recognized by the player. It can be grasped that it is not wasted as an unnecessary internal process, and a sense of security can be obtained.

  Further, after execution of the character effect shown in FIG. 67 (H), display control is performed so that the character enlarged and displayed in the substantially central portion of the effect display device 115 disappears as shown in FIG. 68 (A). . Then, since the displayed character disappears, the player is greatly discouraged. Here, as shown in FIG. 68 (B), the floating body driving device 20 drives, so that the floating body Z located in the floating body concealment area 200b is exposed to the floating body display area 200a and performs a floating operation. Therefore, the floating operation of the floating body Z by the floating body driving device 20 can be visually recognized by the player with the image displayed on the front display and the effect display device 115 as a background. Thus, since the floating body Z that closely resembles the character once disappeared appears, the player changes from disappointment and has a great expectation, so that the mood is further enhanced.

  Here, in the effect display device 115, as described above, stage images corresponding to a plurality of planetary stages are provided as background effects of the decorative symbol 1153, respectively. For example, "Earth Stage" where the stage image corresponding to the Earth is displayed, "Mars Stage" where the stage image corresponding to Mars is displayed, and "Jupiter Stage" where the stage image corresponding to Jupiter is displayed Stage images corresponding to the stages are prepared, and the game proceeds with any of the stage images displayed. Here, the background effect (stage image) displayed in FIGS. 67 (A) to 67 (H) is “Earth stage”.

  Then, as shown in FIG. 68A, at the start of the “second special effect”, a space image (stage lottery image) is displayed as a background effect instead of the current stage image. Therefore, as shown in FIG. 68 (B), the floating body Z that has been moved to the floating body display area 200a and made visible can be seen as if it is flying in outer space. The “stage lottery image” includes at least a plurality of planets as images, and each planet is associated with a “Mars stage”, “Earth stage”, or the like as a destination planet stage.

  Then, as shown in FIGS. 68C to 68D, the floating body Z is displayed in the “stage lottery image” in a front view after floating in the floating body display area 200 a approximately randomly. In addition, the effect display device 115 gradually enlarges and displays the image of the planet that is overlapped with the floating body Z. At the same time, the flight sound from the speakers 18 and 57 that gradually increases the sound volume is output, thereby giving the impression that the floating body Z is gradually approaching the distant planet. Further, after an image showing only the planet is displayed on the effect display device 115, the floating body driving device 20 operates the floating body Z so as to gradually descend. Finally, the floating body Z is moved to the floating body concealment region 200b so that the floating body Z cannot be visually recognized, thereby producing an effect that gives the impression that the floating body Z has landed on the planet.

  As described above, the effect display device 115 and the floating body drive device 20 are controlled so that the effect that the floating body Z lands is directed toward the planet corresponding to the planet stage selected and determined in advance. In other words, it is possible to make it appear that the destination planetary stage is selected and determined corresponding to the planet on which the floating body Z has landed. For example, if the planet on which the floating body Z has landed is “Earth”, “Earth Stage” is selected as the stage transition destination. Further, when the planet on which the floating body Z has landed corresponds to “Mars”, “Mars stage” is selected as the stage transition destination. Thereafter, the stage image corresponding to the planetary stage selected by the stage lottery effect of the floating body driving device 20 is displayed on the effect display device 115 and the game proceeds.

  Specifically, during the execution of the above “stage lottery effect”, the change display of the decorative symbol 1153 based on the hold when the effect point P reaches 10 points is displayed on the upper right of the screen. After the “effect” is finished, the decorative symbol 1153 is stopped and displayed at the center of the screen and the lottery result by the second special symbol lottery means 710 is derived in the same manner as the normal effect mode shown in FIG. 67 (A). Become. However, in the effect display device 115, the decorative symbol 1153 is stopped and displayed with the stage image corresponding to the planet stage (for example, “Mars stage”) selected and determined by the “stage lottery effect” as the background effect. . Thereafter, the game proceeds in the same manner as in FIG. 67 (A) under the “Mars stage”.

  By the way, in this “stage transition privilege mode”, a planetary stage to be a transition destination is selected and determined by an internal lottery at the start of the production. The floating body driving device 20 controls the carriage motor 24 and the fan motor 25 to control the planet displayed on the effect display device 115 so that the floating body Z floats toward the planet corresponding to the stage transition destination. The floating body Z is moved to a position corresponding to.

  However, in the floating body drive device 20, if the floating body Z that is floated by wind force falls due to a malfunction, the floating body Z cannot be landed on the planet corresponding to the stage transition destination. Therefore, in this case, the stage shift is not performed. That is, the stage image corresponding to the current planet stage is continuously displayed as it is, and the subsequent game is advanced. Here, the “problem in which the floating body Z drops midway” includes, for example, a case where wind force cannot be applied evenly due to the inclination of the floating body Z, or a case where a deviation occurs in the transport position of the carriage 285. The presence or absence of the floating body Z can be detected by the distance sensor 26 described above.

  If the planetary stage that is the stage transition destination selected and determined by internal lottery is the same as the current planetary stage, the floating body drive device 20 intentionally drops the floating body Z halfway, An effect that clearly indicates that the stage transition is not performed may be performed.

  In addition, the above “stage transition privilege mode” has exemplified the case where the stage point P reaches 10 points after winning the second start port 392 or the third start port 394, but the stage point P storage lottery is won. The same applies when the production point P reaches 10 points. However, in the latter case, since the symbol variation based on the hold that caused the performance point P to reach 10 points has already started, the “second special effect” is reserved until the symbol variation is started. (Specifically, FIGS. 67D to 67G) are omitted. Therefore, after the character is displayed above the effect point display area 1154 (see FIG. 67 (C)), the effect that the character is enlarged and displayed at the center of the screen is immediately performed (see FIG. 67 (H)). ).

  As described above, in the “stage transition privilege mode” of the present embodiment, the stage lottery effect of the floating body driving device 20 is performed, so that a sense of expectation for the stage transition can be improved. By switching the current planetary stage to another planetary stage, it is possible to prevent the player from getting bored with the game, to renew the player's mood, and to further suppress the decrease in interest.

  Further, in the present embodiment, the floating body Z is floated by the floating body driving device 20, and the stage transition effect is performed using the floating body Z. As a result, the effect image displayed on the effect display device 115 and the floating object Z, which is a physical accessory, can be displayed in a superimposed manner, and a more diverse and impactful effect can be achieved. Furthermore, the floating body Z can freely move in various directions by wind power, and the player cannot grasp the operating principle of the floating body Z at first glance, so it can attract the player's interest more strongly, and as a result, Reduction can be suppressed.

[About special aspects of chance]
Next, in the pachinko machine 1 of the present embodiment, “chance” that is a game effect mode with a special effect that derives a small hit or short hit and directs a transition to a mode that is likely to be advantageous to the player. The “eye special mode” will be described with reference to FIGS. 69 and 70. FIG. FIG. 69 and FIG. 70 are front views showing modes displayed on the effect display device when the “chance eye special mode” is executed. In FIGS. 69 and 70, the floating body Z that is floatingly operated by the floating body driving device 20 is also shown in the effect display device 115.

  The following “chance eye special mode” is executed at the time of a change based on the “chance eye (short hit)” of the variable number 43 or the “chance eye (small hit)” of the variable number 44. That is, the “chance eye special mode” is an effect that is executed regardless of the quantity of effect points P.

  First, as shown in FIG. 69A, in the effect display device 115, in the hold display area 1150 (the first hold display area 1151 and the second hold display area 1152), the first hold storage display section 1151a, The third display mode is displayed on the third hold memory display unit 1151c and the fourth hold memory display unit 1151d, the second display mode is displayed on the second hold memory display unit 1151b, and the fifth hold memory is displayed. The first display mode is displayed on the display unit 1152a, indicating that there are a total of four holds. Also, in the effect point display area 1154, the effect point P is displayed on the effect point 1 display unit 1154a to the effect point 9 display unit 1154i, indicating that 9 effect points P are stored. Further, the decorative symbol 1153 (the left symbol column 1153a, the middle symbol column 1153b, the right symbol column 1153c) is being displayed in a variable manner.

  Here, in the state shown in FIG. 69 (A), when winning short or small hits, as shown in FIG. 69 (B), the symbol “1” is stopped and displayed in the left symbol row 1153a, and the right symbol is displayed. When the “2” symbol is stopped and displayed in the column 1153c and the “3” symbol is stopped in the middle symbol column 1153b, the short hit or the small hit is derived. After the decorative symbol 1153 stops changing, the short hit gaming state or the small hit gaming state is executed. That is, as described above, the opening / closing operation of the jackpot gaming opening / closing device 400 is executed twice as “short hit” or “small hit”.

  Then, a lottery for determining whether or not to execute the mode transition chance is performed. Then, when it is determined to execute the mode transition chance, the mode transition chance accompanied by the effect by the floating body driving device 20 is executed. The mode transition chance of the present embodiment is not necessarily executed by the next change, but is activated after execution of the hold change for the number of times selected by the lottery. On the other hand, when it is determined not to execute the mode transition chance, the mode transition chance is not executed, so that the effect by the floating body driving device 20 is not executed.

  Here, the mode transition chance will be described. The player cannot determine whether it is a small hit or short hit only by the opening / closing operation of the jackpot gaming opening / closing device 40. However, according to the “mode transition chance” in this embodiment, the player has shifted to a probable game state by short hit. In other words, the player's sense of expectation is improved by being able to judge to some extent (in other words, whether or not the normal gaming state remains due to the small hit).

  First, when a mode transition chance is activated, an effect for deriving the activation of the mode transition opportunity is displayed, and then the mode is shifted to any one of a plurality of modes together with an effect by the floating body drive device 20 described later. An effect of drawing lots is displayed. In the present embodiment, the plurality of transfer destination modes include a first mode that is more likely to be a probability change gaming state and a second mode that is more likely to be a probability change gaming state than the first mode. Further, in this mode transition chance, there is a case where the mode is not changed and the normal gaming state is selected (in this embodiment, “disappear”).

  Here, the “mode lottery effect” by the effect display device 115 and the floating body drive device 20 executed at the mode transition chance will be described. First, as shown in FIG. 69C, a space image (mode lottery image) is displayed as a background effect on the effect display device 115 instead of the current planetary stage image. Then, as shown in FIG. 69D, in the floating body driving device 20, the floating body Z that is hidden in the floating body concealment area 200b is moved to the floating body display area 200a by wind power. Then, since the floating body Z becomes visible from the player, it appears to the player that the floating body Z is flying in outer space. This “mode lottery image” includes at least a plurality of planets as images, and each planet is associated with a “first mode” or “second mode” as a mode transition destination.

  Then, as shown in FIGS. 70A to 70B or FIGS. 70D to 70E, the floating body Z has a floating operation in the floating body display region 200a in a substantially random manner. While moving toward a position overlapping any of the planets displayed in the “mode lottery image”, the effect display device 115 gradually enlarges and displays the image of the planet displayed overlapping the floating body Z. At the same time, the flight sound from the speakers 18 and 57 that gradually increases the sound volume is output, thereby giving the impression that the floating body Z is gradually approaching the distant planet. Furthermore, after an image showing only the planet is displayed on the effect display device 115, the floating body Z is operated so as to gradually descend, and finally the floating body Z is moved to the floating body concealment region 200b. By moving it so that it cannot be seen, an effect is given that gives the impression that the floating body Z has landed on the planet.

  As described above, the effect display device 115 and the floating body driving device 20 are controlled so as to produce an effect such that the floating body Z lands toward the planet corresponding to the mode selected and determined in advance. In other words, it is possible to make the transition mode select and determine corresponding to the planet on which the effect that the floating body Z has landed has been made. For example, when the planet on which the floating body Z has landed corresponds to the “first mode”, the “first mode” is selected as the mode transition destination. Further, when the planet on which the floating body Z has landed corresponds to the “second mode”, the “second mode” is selected as the mode transition destination. In addition, when the planet on which the floating body Z has landed corresponds to “losing”, “normal mode (normal gaming state)” is selected as the mode transition destination.

  Then, as shown in FIG. 70C, when the “first mode” is selected by the mode lottery effect, an effect that derives the transition to the “first mode” is executed. For example, in the “first mode”, the background effect displayed on the effect display device 115 is different from the normal mode (for example, a special character effect such as an alien is displayed), and thereafter. The scroll variation of the decorative design 1153 is executed under the effect. Therefore, by executing the “first mode” that is highly likely to be a probability-changing gaming state, it is possible to improve a player's expectation for winning.

  On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 69 (J), when the “second mode” is selected by the mode lottery effect, an effect for deriving the transition to the “second mode” is executed. For example, in the “second mode”, the background effect displayed on the effect display device 115 is different from the normal mode and the “first mode” (for example, a special background effect such as cosmopolis is displayed). Thereafter, the scroll variation of the decorative symbol 1153 is executed under such effects. Therefore, by executing the “second mode” that is more likely to be a probability variation gaming state, it is possible to improve the player's sense of expectation.

  When “normal mode (normal game state)” is selected by the mode lottery effect of the floating body driving device 20, the stage image corresponding to the current planetary stage is displayed as it is without changing the mode (FIG. 69 (A)).

  By the way, in this “mode transition chance”, the mode transition destination is selected and determined by an internal lottery at the start of the production. The floating body driving device 20 controls the carriage motor 24 and the fan motor 25 to control the planet displayed on the effect display device 115 so that the floating body Z is stopped and displayed on the planet corresponding to the mode transition destination. The floating body Z is moved to the corresponding position.

  However, in the floating body drive device 20, when the floating body Z that is floated by wind force falls due to a malfunction, the floating body Z is not landing on the planet corresponding to the mode transition destination. Therefore, in this case, mode transition is not performed. That is, the background effect corresponding to the current mode is continuously displayed as it is, and the subsequent game is advanced. Here, the “problem in which the floating body Z drops midway” includes, for example, a case where wind force cannot be applied evenly due to the inclination of the floating body Z, or a case where a deviation occurs in the transport position of the carriage 285. The presence or absence of the floating body Z can be detected by the distance sensor 26 described above.

  In addition, when the mode transition destination selected and determined by the internal lottery is the same as the current mode, the floating body driving device 20 intentionally drops the floating body Z halfway, so that the mode transition is not performed. An effect that clearly indicates this may be performed.

  As described above, in the “chance eye special mode” of the present embodiment, not only the small hit or short win is derived, but also the mode lottery effect of the floating body driving device 20 is performed, so the expectation for the win or mode transition A feeling can be improved and the fall of interest can be suppressed.

  Further, in the present embodiment, the floating body Z is floated by the floating body driving device 20, and the effect of mode transition is performed using the floating body Z. As a result, the effect image displayed on the effect display device 115 and the floating object Z, which is a physical accessory, can be displayed in a superimposed manner, and a more diverse and impactful effect can be achieved. Furthermore, the floating body Z can freely move in various directions by wind power, and the player cannot grasp the operating principle of the floating body Z at first glance, so it can attract the player's interest more strongly, and as a result, Reduction can be suppressed.

[Others]
In the above embodiment, the stage selection privilege mode is used to select the destination planetary stage by the floating action of the floating body Z, and the destination mode is selected by the floating action of the floating body Z in the “chance eye special mode”. The effect of selecting is illustrated. However, the floating body drive device 20 can produce other aspects of the floating operation of the floating body Z.

  For example, “decision” or “losing” may be derived by the floating action of the floating body Z when the decorative design 1153 of the effect display device 115 changes. Specifically, in the reach state in which the left symbol row 1153a and the right symbol row 1153c are stopped and displayed with the same symbol and only the middle symbol row 1153b is variably displayed, the floating body Z is floated by driving the floating body driving device 20. It is displayed in the body display area 200a. Then, the floating body Z that is floated by the floating body driving device 20 performs an effect such that it fights against an alien displayed on the effect display device 115. If the internal lottery result is a big win under such a production, after performing the production in which the floating body Z wins the battle with the alien and reaches the predetermined planet, The symbol row 1153b is stopped and displayed with the same symbol as the left symbol row 1153a and the right symbol row 1153c to derive a jackpot, and the jackpot game is executed. On the other hand, when the internal lottery result is a loss, after the floating body Z is defeated by the battle with the alien and crashed, the middle symbol row 1153b is changed to the left symbol row 1153a and the right symbol row 1153a. The display is stopped with a symbol different from that of the column 1153c to derive a loss. Thus, by deriving the lottery or loser lottery result by the floating action of the floating body Z, it is possible to give the player a great expectation and an unprecedented interest.

  Further, at the end of the jackpot game, it may be derived whether or not the probability change game is performed by the floating action of the floating body Z (so-called promotion effect from the normal jackpot to the probability change jackpot). Specifically, at the end of the 15-round jackpot game based on the normal jackpot being derived by the decorative symbol 1153, the floating body driving device 20 drives the floating body Z to be displayed in the floating body display area 200a. Then, the floating body Z that is floated by the floating body driving device 20 performs an effect such that it fights against an alien displayed on the effect display device 115. Under such production, when the internal lottery result is a promising big hit, after performing the production that the floating body Z wins the battle with the alien and reaches the predetermined planet, Run a probable game. On the other hand, when the internal lottery result is a loss, the base game is executed after performing an effect such that the floating body Z loses the battle with the alien and crashes. Thus, by deriving the promotion effect from the normal jackpot to the probable jackpot by the floating action of the floating body Z, it is possible to give the player a greater expectation and interest.

  The gaming machine of the present embodiment described above includes the following means. The following means are provided alone or in appropriate combination.

Means 1. An outer frame formed in a vertically long rectangular shape;
A main body frame that is pivotally supported on one side of the front surface of the outer frame and is freely opened and closed;
A cover member that is detachably attached to the back surface of the main body frame and forms a housing space with the main body frame;
A game board having a game board portion accommodated in the accommodation space and in which a game area is mainly formed;
A launcher for driving a game ball toward the game area;
Operation means for instructing the game ball to be driven by the launching device;
A start opening provided in the game area and into which a game ball can enter;
A movable member that is provided in the vicinity of the start opening and facilitates the entry of the game ball into the start opening by being controlled to be opened;
Movable member driving means provided on the back side of the game board portion for opening and closing the movable member;
A special winning opening that is provided in the gaming area and can be changed between a closed state in which it is difficult to receive a game ball and an open state in which it is easier to receive a game ball than the closed state;
Special winning opening driving means provided on the back side of the game board portion for opening and closing the special winning opening;
An effect display device that is provided on the back side of the game board and in which an effect display including a variation display of decorative symbols is performed,
Start determination means for determining whether or not a game ball has entered the start opening;
A lottery means for performing an internal lottery based on the determination of the entrance of a game ball by the start determination means;
And, when winning the lottery by the lottery means, special game execution means for opening and closing the special prize opening by the special prize opening driving means and executing a special game,
Main control means having at least
Wired to the main control means,
Effect display control means for performing effect display according to the lottery result by the lottery means via the effect display device,
Sub-control means having at least
A control unit having at least a main control box attached to the back side of the game board with the main control means accommodated, and a sub control box attached to the back side of the game board with the sub control means accommodated When,
In the game board, provided on the front side of the control unit, air blowing means for creating a flow of air,
A heat absorbing / dissipating means capable of cooling the air from the blowing means,
The sub-control unit includes a blower control unit that controls the blower unit, controls the heat absorbing / dissipating unit, and sends out the cooled air to the accommodation space.

  Conventionally, a game board is provided with a main board, a peripheral board, and the like, and therefore, the inside of the gaming machine tends to become hot due to heat generated by the CPU, for example. In addition, since the game board is provided with a driving device such as a solenoid, a liquid crystal display, and the like, there is a possibility that heat is generated also in this portion. Further, the back of the game board is covered with a cover member. For this reason, there is a concern that heat stays and the inside of the gaming machine becomes high temperature, for example, adversely affects control processing of the main board and the like.

  In means 1, there are a movable member driving means and a special prize opening driving means on the back side of the game board part, and a liquid crystal display device and a control unit are on the back side of the game board. The control unit has at least a main control box that houses the main control means and a sub control box that houses the sub control means. Such a game board is accommodated in an accommodation space formed by a main body frame and a cover member. A cover member is detachably attached to the back surface of the main body frame. When the cover member is attached to the back surface of the main body frame, a space is formed between the main body frame and the cover member. In the said means 1, this space is called accommodation space. In this housing space, the liquid crystal display device and the control unit are housed. In other words, the game board is housed between the side walls of the main body frame, and the cover member is attached to the back side of the main body frame. At this time, both the liquid crystal display device and the control unit are housed in the housing space together with the game board. Therefore, although the back surface is not usually sealed with the cover member, there is a possibility that heat may stay between the cover member and the back surface of the game board. In this respect, in the means 1, the air blowing means is arranged on the front side of the control unit. Moreover, the heat absorption / radiation means which can cool the air from a ventilation means was provided. Here, in particular, the blower control unit controls the blower unit and the heat absorbing / dissipating unit, and the cooled air is sent out to the accommodation space. As a result, heat retention on the back side of the gaming board can be suppressed, and problems caused by the high temperature inside the gaming machine can be suppressed.

  The configuration for sending out the cooled air to the accommodation space includes a configuration for sending out air toward the control unit and a configuration for sending out air toward the effect display device. The cooled air moves through the high temperature portion, thereby depriving the heat of the high temperature portion. Therefore, the flow path of the cooled air may be formed by a laminated component including at least the control unit on the back side of the game board. In this sense, “the cooled air sent out by the air blowing control means passes through a flow path formed by a laminated component on the back side of the game board including at least the control unit, and is outside the accommodation space. It may be "to be discharged". Further, in view of the fact that the heat generating members (main control box, sub control box, effect display device, etc.) that generate heat are arranged on the back side of the game board, “the cooled air sent out by the air blowing control means” May be discharged to the outside of the accommodation space after exchanging heat with a heat-generating member that generates heat or a high-temperature member that retains heat.

Mean 2. In the gaming machine described in means 1,
At least an accessory production space that can be seen from the front,
A flying member that is freely movable in the accessory effect space,
The blowing means can create an air flow that makes the flying member in a flying state in the accessory effect space,
The game machine according to claim 1, wherein the air blowing control means is capable of remotely controlling the flying member by controlling the air blowing means.

  In the means 2, the flying member is freely movable in the accessory effect space. That is, the flying member is disposed in the accessory effect space alone without any link mechanism. Further, the air blowing means creates an air flow that causes the flying member to be in a flying state in the accessory effect space. Then, the air blowing means is controlled by the air blowing control means, and the flying member is remotely controlled. Remote control here refers to controlling indirectly by sending air. Conventionally, in order to move an accessory, a link mechanism is provided, but here, the accessory is remotely controlled without using a link mechanism. If the object is controlled by the link mechanism, the movement of the object may be expected to some extent. On the other hand, if the remote control is not performed via the link mechanism, the movement of the flying member is not limited and can be freely controlled. Further, in the configuration in which the flying member is remotely controlled, the flight position of the flying member varies due to various disturbance factors. This makes the movement of the flying member unpredictable. As a result, the player can keep an eye on the effects of the actors, can achieve an interesting entertainment using the actors, contribute to the elimination of the monotony of the game, and suppress the decline in the interest of the games it can. In addition, using the air blowing means also for the effect production is advantageous in terms of cost.

Means 3. In the gaming machine described in means 2,
The blowing control means cools the inside of the gaming machine by creating an air flow toward the accommodation space by the blowing means, while creating an air flow toward the accessory effect space by the blowing means. A game machine characterized in that the flying member is remotely controlled by means of the above.

  In the means 3, the inside of the gaming machine is cooled by creating an air flow toward the accommodation space by the blowing means. On the other hand, the flying member is remotely controlled by creating an air flow toward the accessory effect space by the blowing means. Thus, the inside of the gaming machine can be cooled except during the effect production. Therefore, it is possible to reliably suppress problems caused by the high temperature inside the gaming machine.

Means 4. In the gaming machine according to means 2 or 3,
The blowing means is at least
A fan section that creates a flow of air;
A gaming machine comprising: a substantially cylindrical air guide unit that guides air from the fan unit to the accessory effect space and creates an updraft in the accessory effect space.

  According to the means 4, the air blowing means generates the air flow, and the substantially cylindrical wind guide that guides the air from the fan part to the accessory effect space and generates the updraft in the accessory effect space. Part. As a result, it is possible to easily create an updraft that pushes up the flying member.

Means 5. In the gaming machine according to means 4,
In order to move the generation position of the updraft in the accessory effect space, a moving means for moving the fan unit according to the flow path of the air guide section having a plurality of flow paths corresponding to the generation position is provided. ,
The game machine according to claim 1, wherein the air blowing control means can remotely control the flying member in the accessory effect space in the horizontal direction by controlling the generation position of the ascending air current via the moving means.

  According to the means 5, the flying member in the accessory effect space is remotely controlled in the horizontal direction by controlling the generation position of the rising air current via the moving means. Thereby, it can suppress reliably that the movement of an accessory becomes monotonous, and can give the further width | variety to the production using an accessory. In addition, the air guide section has a plurality of flow paths corresponding to the generation position of the updraft, and the fan section is moved in accordance with the flow paths. Thereby, the ascending air current can be moved in the horizontal direction relatively easily.

Means 6. In the gaming machine according to means 4 or 5,
The heat absorbing / dissipating means is provided in the wind guide portion,
The air blow control means cools the air from the air blowing section by the air absorbing / dissipating means to cool the air from the air blowing means.

  According to the means 6, since the air from the air blowing means is cooled by cooling the air guiding part with the heat absorbing / dissipating means provided in the air guiding part, the air cooling configuration becomes relatively simple.

Mean 7 In the gaming machine according to means 6,
The game machine, wherein the heat absorbing / dissipating means is attached to the outside of a wall portion constituting the air guide portion, and cools the air from the air blowing means by cooling the wall portion of the air guide portion.

  In the means 7, the heat absorbing / dissipating means is attached to the outside of the wall portion constituting the air guiding portion, and the air from the air blowing means is cooled by cooling the wall portion of the air guiding portion. Thereby, compared with the structure which provides an absorption-and-dissipation means in a flow path, the airflow which passes a flow path is not inhibited. Moreover, since it is attached to the outside of the wall portion, when the heat absorbing / dissipating means is replaced, the operation becomes relatively easy.

Means 8. In the gaming machine according to any one of means 2 to 7,
The gaming machine characterized in that the accessory effect space is provided in a gaming area.

  Conventionally, since a link mechanism is necessary to move an accessory, the arrangement place of the accessory is limited. On the other hand, in the present invention, in order to remotely control the flying member without using the link mechanism, an accessory effect space may be provided in the game area as shown in the means 8 in particular. In this way, the actors appear alone in the game area, and the effects using the actors stand out.

Means 9. In the gaming machine according to any one of means 2 to 8,
The gaming machine characterized in that the accessory effect space is provided in front of the effect display device so that the effect display on the effect display device is visible through the accessory effect space.

  According to the means 9, since the effect effect space is provided in front of the effect display device so that the effect display in the effect display device can be visually recognized through the effect effect effect space, the flying member is in front of the effect image. It will appear alone. As a result, the effect using the feature is more conspicuous.

Means 10. In the gaming machine according to any one of means 2 to 9,
The gaming machine effect space is formed as an upper space of a mesh-like lower plate ventilation portion through which the flying member cannot pass.

  According to the means 10, since the effect effect space is formed as the space above the mesh-like lower plate ventilation portion through which the flying member cannot pass, it is necessary to always generate an ascending air current so that the flying member is in a flying state. Disappears. Further, even if the flying member has deviated from the ascending airflow for some reason, the flying member does not fall below the accessory effect space.

Means 11. In the gaming machine according to any one of means 2 to 10,
The gaming machine effect space is formed as a space below a mesh-shaped upper plate ventilation portion through which the flying member cannot pass.

  According to the means 11, since the accessory effect space is formed as the lower space of the mesh-like upper plate ventilation portion through which the flying member cannot pass, the inflowing air is allowed to escape to the outside, and the updraft Can be suppressed. As a result, remote control of the flying member is relatively easy. In addition, the flying member does not rise above the accessory effect space due to some factor.

Means 12. In the gaming machine according to any one of means 1 to 11,
Temperature detecting means for detecting the temperature of the air from the blowing means,
The air blow control means controls the temperature of the air from the air blowing means by the heat absorbing / dissipating means based on the temperature detected by the temperature detecting means.

  According to the means 12, since the temperature from the air blowing means is controlled based on the temperature detected by the temperature detecting means, the air can be cooled as necessary. As a result, it is possible to reliably suppress problems caused by the generation of the high temperature part.

Means 13. In the gaming machine according to means 12,
When the temperature detected by the temperature detection unit exceeds a predetermined temperature, the air blowing control unit sends cooled air to the accommodation space in preference to the remote control of the flying member. Gaming machine.

  According to the means 13, when the temperature detected by the temperature detection means exceeds a predetermined temperature, the cooled air is sent out to the accommodation space in preference to the remote control of the flying member. Thereby, the malfunction by the inside of a gaming machine becoming high temperature can be suppressed reliably.

Means 14. In the gaming machine according to any one of means 1 to 13,
The gaming machine according to claim 1, wherein the heat absorbing / dissipating means comprises a Peltier element.

  For example, as shown in the means 14, a Peltier element may be adopted as the heat absorbing / dissipating means. In this way, the heat absorbing / dissipating means can be configured relatively easily.

  In the configuration shown in each of the above means, the outer frame 2 of the present embodiment constitutes an “outer frame”, the main body frame 3 constitutes a “main body frame”, and the rear cover body 210 constitutes a “cover member”. To do. Further, the game board base 266 constitutes a “game board portion”, the game board 5 constitutes a “game board”, the launcher unit 194 constitutes a “launcher”, and the operation handle 32 designates “operation means”. Constitute. In addition, the first start port 390, the second start port 392, and the third start port 394 of this embodiment form a “start port”, the movable piece 396 forms a “movable member”, and the ordinary electric accessory solenoid 638. Constitutes a “movable member driving means”, the jackpot gaming big prize opening 400a constitutes a “special prize winning opening”, and the jackpot gaming opening / closing device opening / closing solenoid 642 constitutes a “special prize opening driving means”, and an effect display The device 115 constitutes an “effect display device”, the main board 600 constitutes “main control means”, and the peripheral board 660 constitutes “sub-control means”. Furthermore, the main control board box 132 constitutes a “main control box”, and the sub control board box 130 constitutes a “sub control box”. And the floating body movement area | region 200 of this embodiment comprises "the accessory effect space", and the floating body Z comprises the "flying member." In addition, the blower fan 284 of the present embodiment constitutes a “fan part”, and the air guide part 22 constitutes a “air guide part”, whereby the fan operation part 28 constitutes a “blower unit”. The fan operation unit 28 (carriage 285) also constitutes “moving means”. Furthermore, the floating body drive substrate 500 constitutes “blower control means”, the Peltier module 29 constitutes “heat absorption / dissipation means”, and the temperature sensor 249 constitutes “temperature detection means”. Further, the mesh upper plate 21a constitutes an “upper plate ventilation portion”, and the mesh lower plate 21b constitutes a “lower plate ventilation portion”.

  Moreover, although this invention is described in said preferable embodiment, this invention is not restrict | limited only to it. Various embodiments are possible without departing from the spirit and scope of the invention.

  For example, the effect image display device in the above-described embodiment is not limited to the liquid crystal display device, and may be a display device such as an EL display device, a plasma display device, and a CRT.

  Furthermore, in the above embodiment, the pachinko machine 1 is shown as a gaming machine, but a gaming machine other than the pachinko machine, for example, a pachislot machine, a gaming machine that fuses a pachinko machine and a pachislot machine, etc. The invention can be applied. In consideration of the application of the present invention to a pachislot machine, the “game ball” in each of the above configurations may be used as a “game medium”.

  In other words, a pachinko machine is a game in which an input medium such as a game ball that is a medium that a player inserts into the game machine and a game medium that is a medium used for a substantial game performed by the player are the same. This is a type of gaming machine in which a game is played using a medium such as a game ball that has been inserted. Specifically, “a launching device that launches a game ball in response to the operation of the operation handle, and appropriate equipment such as a number of obstacle nails, center objects, display means, etc. A game area provided with an appropriate entrance for a game ball such as a mouth, a passage opening, an arrival opening, etc., a rail for guiding the game ball from the launching device to the game area, and a game ball guided to the game area It is provided with a payout means for paying out a predetermined number of game balls as prize balls according to the entrance to the entrance and according to the entrance mode of the game balls to a plurality of entrances.

  There are various types of pachinko machines, which are generally represented by what is referred to as “digipachi”, “entrance state detection means for detecting the entrance state to the entrance (ie, game state) Detection means), lottery means for performing a predetermined lottery when a ball is detected by the entrance state detection means, and special symbol display means for changing the special symbol according to the lottery result of the lottery means and stopping the fluctuation. Or “additional effect image display means for displaying a decorative symbol sequence composed of a plurality of decorative symbols and causing characters or the like to appear at a predetermined timing” , Which is generally represented by what is referred to as a “multi-function machine”, comprising a lottery means for performing lottery by distributing game balls in an accessory and lottery means for performing lottery by winning at the start opening. ”, Represented by what is generally called“ Alepatchi ”“ For example, one game is played with a predetermined number of game balls, such as 16 games, and the game balls are placed in a plurality of entrances in one game. In accordance with this, “a payout of a predetermined number of game balls” can be exemplified.

  On the other hand, with a pachislot machine, a medal that is a game medium is inserted, and after inserting the medal, a symbol string composed of a plurality of symbols is displayed in a variable manner in accordance with the operation of the starting operation means (for example, an operation lever). It is a slot machine with a stop operation function that performs a substantial game of stopping the fluctuation of the symbol sequence in accordance with the operation of the stop operation means (for example, a stop button). If the stop operating means is not operated even after a predetermined time has elapsed, the change in the symbol sequence may be stopped when the predetermined time has elapsed. And, when the combination of symbols at the time of stopping the variation of the symbol row satisfies a specific condition, a predetermined number of medals can be paid out according to the satisfied condition, or the player can acquire a large amount of medals. In addition, a special advantageous state advantageous to the player is generated.

  In addition, a gaming machine in which a pachinko machine and a pachislot machine are combined is a plurality of (for example, five) game balls that are used as one unit of input medium. ) Is variably displayed in accordance with the operation of), and thereafter, the variation of the symbol string is stopped in accordance with the operation of the stop operation means (for example, stop button). If the stop operating means is not operated even after a predetermined time has elapsed, the change in the symbol sequence may be stopped when the predetermined time has elapsed. And, when the combination of symbols at the time when the variation of the symbol sequence is stopped satisfies a specific condition, a predetermined number of medals can be paid out according to the satisfied condition, or the player can acquire a large number of medals. In this case, a special advantageous state advantageous to the player is generated.

  In addition, it seems that there is no gaming medium at first glance in a gaming machine that does not play a substantial game depending on the inserted medium, such as a pachislot machine or a gaming machine in which a pachinko machine and a pachislot machine are fused However, even with such a gaming machine, it can be assumed that the game content played using a game ball or other appropriate article is included in the entire game content. Therefore, even such a gaming machine can be a target of a gaming machine in which a game is played using a gaming medium.

  In addition, the effect display device in the above-described embodiment is preferably a liquid crystal display device, but is not necessarily limited to a liquid crystal display device. It may be a display device such as an EL display device, a plasma display device, and a CRT. That is, as long as the first display mode, the third display mode, and the second display mode can be displayed, and any of these modes can be hidden, the mode is not limited.

It is a perspective view which shows the state by which the main body frame was opened by the one side of the outer frame of a pachinko machine, and the front frame was opened by the one side of the main body frame. It is a front view which shows the whole front side of a pachinko machine. It is a perspective view which isolate | separates the main body frame and game board of a pachinko machine, and shows from diagonally upper right front. It is a rear view which shows the whole rear side of a pachinko machine. It is a perspective view which shows the whole rear side of a pachinko machine from upper right back. It is a perspective view which shows the state which removed the back cover body, various control boards, etc. from the perspective view of the pachinko machine shown in FIG. It is a perspective view which shows the state by which various members were assembled | attached to the main body frame of the pachinko machine from diagonally upper right back. It is a perspective view which shows a main-body frame simple substance from diagonally upper right back. It is a perspective view which shows the game board with which various control board boxes were mounted | worn from lower right back. It is an enlarged front view showing the configuration of a game board having a game area. It is a perspective view which shows a game board from diagonally forward. It is a top view of a game board. It is a side view of a game board. It is a rear view of the game board centering on a floating body drive device. It is a back perspective view of the game board centering on a floating body drive device. It is a side cross-sectional enlarged view centering on the ventilation fan. It is a back surface enlarged view of the floating body drive device for demonstrating the operating principle of a floating body. It is a back surface enlarged view of the floating body drive device for demonstrating the operating principle of a floating body. It is a back surface enlarged view of the floating body drive device for demonstrating the operating principle of a floating body. It is a back surface enlarged view of the floating body drive device for demonstrating the operating principle of a floating body. FIG. 2 is a block diagram schematically showing a control configuration, mainly showing a configuration around a main substrate. FIG. 2 is a block diagram schematically showing a control configuration, mainly showing a configuration around a peripheral substrate. It is a functional block diagram which shows roughly the functional structure of the peripheral control board in a main board | substrate and a peripheral board | substrate. It is the figure which looked at the production display device from the front. It is a block diagram which shows the functional structure of the periphery control board in a periphery board | substrate. It is a flowchart which shows an example of the main system process which CPU mounted in the main control board of a main board | substrate performs. It is a flowchart which shows an example of a process at the time of power failure generation | occurrence | production. It is a flowchart which shows an example of a timer interruption process. It is a flowchart which shows an example of a special symbol and a special electric accessory control process. It is a figure which shows an example of the memory | storage area | region concerned with a reservation order. It is a flowchart which shows an example of a 1st, 2nd, 3rd starting opening prize process. It is a flowchart which shows an example of a fluctuation | variation start process. It is a flowchart which shows an example of a fluctuation pattern setting process. It is a flowchart which shows an example of the time variation pattern table setting process per 1st special symbol length. It is a list figure which shows the variation pattern selected in the pattern table setting process at the time of the 1st special symbol length. It is a flowchart which shows an example of the time variation pattern table setting process per 2nd special symbol length. It is a list figure which shows the fluctuation pattern selected in the 2nd special symbol length per hour fluctuation pattern table setting process. It is a flowchart which shows an example of a short hit hour fluctuation pattern table setting process. It is a flowchart which shows an example of a small hit hour fluctuation pattern table setting process. It is a table | surface figure which shows the fluctuation pattern selected in the short hit hour fluctuation pattern table setting process and the small hit hour fluctuation pattern table setting process. It is a flowchart which shows an example of the fluctuation pattern table setting process at the time of the 1st special symbol removal. FIG. 42 is a flowchart continued from A of FIG. 41. FIG. It is a table | surface figure which shows the variation pattern selected when it is judged as reach in the 1st special symbol deviation variation pattern table setting process. It is a flowchart which shows an example of a 2nd special symbol change time fluctuation pattern table setting process. FIG. 45 is a flowchart continuing from C in FIG. 44. FIG. It is a table | surface figure which shows the variation pattern selected when it is judged that it is reach in the 2nd special symbol deviation variation pattern table setting process. It is a table | surface figure which shows an example of the variation pattern selected when it is not judged as reach in the 1st special symbol deviation time fluctuation pattern table setting process and the 2nd special symbol loss time fluctuation pattern table setting processing. It is a flowchart which shows an example of the process during a fluctuation | variation. It is a flowchart which shows an example of a jackpot game start process. It is a flowchart which shows an example of a small hit game start process. It is a flowchart which shows an example of a special electric accessory big hit control process. It is a flowchart which shows an example of a special electric accessory small hit control process. It is a timing chart which shows an example of the change time concerning the change pattern of the detachment without the reach production at the time short-time function non-operation. It is a timing chart which shows an example of the fluctuation time concerning the deviation fluctuation pattern which does not accompany the reach production at the time short-time function operation. It is a functional block diagram which shows mainly the function which concerns on display mode determination among the functional structures of a main control board. It is a time chart which expressed the display mode of the 1st special symbol and the 2nd special symbol in time series. It is a flowchart which shows an example of a sub main process. It is a flowchart which shows an example of 16 ms regular process. It is a flowchart which shows an example of a command analysis process. It is a flowchart which shows an example of production control processing. It is a flowchart which shows an example of a 1st, 2nd, 3rd start opening effective winning memory | storage process. It is a flowchart which shows an example of a 2nd and 3rd start opening effective winning effect process. It is a flowchart which shows an example of a decoration design change start process. It is a flowchart which shows an example of the special effect lottery process in a decoration design change start process. It is a figure which shows an example of the table for determining whether an effect point storage process is performed. It is a front view of the center object for demonstrating the storage display mode of a production | presentation point, and the floating operation | movement of a floating body. It is a front view which shows the aspect displayed with an effect display apparatus at the time of execution of a "stage transfer privilege aspect." It is a front view which shows the aspect displayed with an effect display apparatus at the time of execution of a "stage transfer privilege aspect." It is a front view which shows the aspect displayed with an effect display apparatus at the time of execution of a "chance eyes special aspect." It is a front view which shows the aspect displayed with an effect display apparatus at the time of execution of a "chance eyes special aspect."

Explanation of symbols

DESCRIPTION OF SYMBOLS 1 Pachinko machine 2 Outer frame 3 Main body frame 4 Front frame 5 Game board 6 Bottom receiving plate 7 Hinge mechanism 11 Front frame body 12 Game board installation frame 13 Mechanism installation body 14 Outer frame side hinge tool 15 Main body frame side hinge tool 16 Speaker box 17 Speaker mounting plate 18 Speaker 19 Launch rail 20 Floating body drive device 21 Transparent case 21a Mesh upper plate 21b Mesh lower plate 22 Air guide portion 22a Wall portion 22b Side wall 22c Side wall,
22d Wall portion 23 Heat sink 24 Carriage motor 25 Fan motor 26 Distance sensor 27 Reflector plate 28 Fan operation unit 29 Peltier module 30 Lower front plate 31 Lower plate 32 Operation handle 33 Ashtray 33 Fluctuation number 34 Ball discharge lever 36 Hinge mechanism 37 Game area 38 Opening window 39 Window frame 50 Transparent plate 51 Upper plate 52 Side decoration device 53 Acoustic decoration device 54 Side decoration body 55 Lens 56 Transparent cover body 57 Speaker 58 Speaker cover 60 Production selection switch 70 Locking device 71 Closing tool 72 Body frame locking hook 73 Closing tool 74 Door locking hook 75 Cylinder lock 76 Outer rail 77 Inner rail 78 Guide rail 79 Front component member 80 Game area forming wall 82 Normal symbol indicator 84 First special symbol indicator 86 Second special symbol indicator 88 First Special symbol hold indicator 90 2 Special symbol hold indicator 92 Normal symbol hold indicator 100a Internal space 100b Lower end opening 100c Upper end hole 115 Production display device 115a First determination result display region 115b Second determination result display region 115c Common symbol display region 116 Display device control Substrate 117 Display device control board box 118 Box mounting base 119 Sub control board 130 Sub control board box 131 Main control board 132 Main control board box 133 Tank mounting section 134 Rail mounting section 135 Dispensing apparatus mounting section 136 Ball tank 137 Bottom plate section 138 Release Exit 139 Rail component 150 Tank rail 151 Front wall portion 152 Rear wall portion 155 Rail shelf 156 Rectifier 157 Shaft 158 Rail receiving portion 170 Ball dispensing device 172 Discharging motor 173 Opening portion 192 Launching motor 193 Mounting substrate 194 Launching device unit 195 Power supply board 196 Power supply board box 197 Discharge control board 198 Discharge control board box 199 Power relay terminal board 200 Floating body moving area 200a Floating body display area 200b Floating body concealing area 210 Rear cover body 211 Cover hinge mechanism 212 Rear wall 213 Peripheral wall part 213a Wall part 213b Wall part 213c Upper side wall part 214 Hinge body 215 Hinge pin 216 Hinge body 217 Elastic closing body 218 Inspection connector 220 Air blow block 221 Partition plate 222 Air blow hole 223 Guide wall 230 Heat radiation hole 231 Heat radiation hole 232 Heat radiation hole 233 Heat radiation hole 235 Sealing part 237 Code holder 238 Distribution board 239 Board connector 249 Temperature sensor 250 Carriage motor sensor 251 Fan motor sensor 252 Interface board 253 Lower plate ball derivative 254 Board box Box 260 Winning mouth unit 262 Side decoration member 264 Through hole 266 Game board base 268 Substrate box holder 270 Back unit 281 Main body 282 Guide rail 283 Gear belt 284 Blower fan 284a Fan main body 284b Heating body 285 Carriage 286 Rotating body 287 Driven pulley 300 Center Item 301 Opening 304 Center decoration lamp 306 Warp inlet 312 Warp outlet 330 First stage 336 Warp outlet side end 338 Warp counter-exit side end 350 Second stage 368 First start guide port 370 Frame-shaped decorative body 370a Lower frame 370b Left frame 372 Opening portion 374 First start opening guide path 390 First start opening 392 Second start opening 394 Third start opening 396 A pair of movable pieces 400 Big hit game opening / closing device 400a Big hit game big prize opening 4 0b Big winning game opening door opening door 402 Passing gate 404 General winning port 406 Ball outlet 500 Floating body drive board 600 Main board 614 Lower plate full tank switch 616 Launch control board 618 External terminal board 620 Inner frame release switch 622 Door open Switch 624 Panel relay terminal board 626 Production switchgear relay terminal board 628 Game switchgear relay terminal board 630 Gate sensor 632 General winning opening sensor 636 Normal symbol / special symbol display board 638 Normal electric accessory solenoid 640 Game switchgear count Sensor 642 Game opening / closing device opening / closing solenoid 644 First start opening sensor 646 Second start opening sensor 648 Third start opening sensor 650 All winning opening winning prize detection sensor 660 Peripheral board 662 Peripheral control board 674 Frame decoration relay terminal board 676 Frame decoration Lamp 688 Lamp drive base Board 690 Panel decoration lamp 694 Center decoration drive unit relay terminal board 700 First special symbol lottery means 702 First special symbol per-determination random number extraction means 703 First special symbol hold counter 704 First special symbol success / failure judgment means 706 Special symbol normal Per hour determination table 708 Special symbol probability change per hour determination table 710 Second special symbol lottery means 712 Second special symbol per random number extraction means 713 Second special symbol hold counter 714 Second special symbol success / failure determination means 720 Normal symbol Lottery means 722 Normal symbol per-determination random number extraction means 723 Normal symbol hold counter 724 Normal symbol success / failure determination means 726 Normal symbol normal per-hour determination table 727 Normal symbol probability change per-time determination table 728 Third start opening / closing control means 730 1 Special symbol hold display control means 73 Second special symbol hold display control means 734 Normal symbol hold display control means 740 Probability game execution means 742 Time-short game execution means 744 Opening / closing operation control means 746 Small hit game execution means 748 Big hit game execution means 749 Command transmission means 750 Command reception means 760 Production lottery means 762 Production effect operation execution means 790 Reservation order storage means 800 Production image display control means 802 First special symbol display control means 804 Second special symbol display control means 806 Normal symbol display control means 810 First display mode determination Means 811 First display mode determination / selection means 812 Reach out-of-display display mode selection / determination means 813 Hit display mode selection / determination means 814 Outlier display mode determination means 815 Advantageous gaming state out-of-display display mode determination means 820 Second display mode determination means 821 Second display Aspect determination selection means 822 Torch off special display mode selection determining means 823 Special display mode selection determining means 824 Off special display mode determining means 825 Advantageous gaming state shortening off display mode determining means 830 Display mode storage means 851 First special symbol image display control means 852 2 Special symbol image display control means 855 Production hold count means 860 Merge hold display control means 870 Merge hold order storage means 872 First special symbol hold number storage means 874 Second special symbol hold number storage means 1150 Hold display area 1151 First Hold display area 1151a First hold storage display section 1151b Second hold storage display section 1151c Third hold storage display section 1151d Fourth hold storage display section 1152 Second hold display area 1152a Fifth hold storage display section 1152b 6th reserved memory display part 1152c 7th reserved memory display part 1152d Eight reserved storage display unit 1153 Decoration symbol 1153a Left symbol row 1153b Middle symbol row 1153c Right symbol row 1154 Effect point display area 1154a Effect point 1 display portion 1154b Effect point 2 display portion 1154c Effect point 3 display portion 1154d Effect point 4 Display unit 1154e Effect point 5 display unit 1154f Effect point 6 display unit 1154g Effect point 7 display unit 1154h Effect point 8 display unit 1154i Effect point 9 display unit 1154j Effect point 10 display unit 6061 Special symbol random number storage area 6061a First storage area 6061b 2nd storage area 6061c 3rd storage area 6061d 4th storage area 6061e 5th storage area 6061f 6th storage area 6061g 7th storage area 6061h 8th storage area 6062 Pass 8601 holdable information image display control unit 8602 hold information image display control unit 8603 hold information image display control unit 8604 identity code image display control unit 8605 merged pending order image display control unit Z float

Claims (1)

An outer frame formed in a vertically long rectangular shape;
A main body frame that is pivotally supported on one side of the front surface of the outer frame and is freely opened and closed;
A cover member that is detachably attached to the back surface of the main body frame and forms a housing space with the main body frame;
A game board having a game board portion accommodated in the accommodation space and in which a game area is mainly formed;
A launcher for driving a game ball toward the game area;
Operation means for instructing the game ball to be driven by the launching device;
A start opening provided in the game area and into which a game ball can enter;
A movable member that is provided in the vicinity of the start opening and facilitates the entry of the game ball into the start opening by being controlled to be opened;
Movable member driving means provided on the back side of the game board portion for opening and closing the movable member;
A special winning opening that is provided in the gaming area and can be changed between a closed state in which it is difficult to receive a game ball and an open state in which it is easier to receive a game ball than the closed state;
Special winning opening driving means provided on the back side of the game board portion for opening and closing the special winning opening;
An effect display device that is provided on the back side of the game board and in which an effect display including a variation display of decorative symbols is performed,
Start determination means for determining whether or not a game ball has entered the start opening;
A lottery means for performing an internal lottery based on the determination of the entrance of a game ball by the start determination means;
And, when winning the lottery by the lottery means, special game execution means for opening and closing the special prize opening by the special prize opening driving means and executing a special game,
Main control means having at least
Wired to the main control means,
Effect display control means for performing effect display according to the lottery result by the lottery means via the effect display device,
Sub-control means having at least
A control unit having at least a main control box attached to the back side of the game board with the main control means accommodated, and a sub control box attached to the back side of the game board with the sub control means accommodated When,
In the game board, provided on the front side of the control unit, air blowing means for creating a flow of air,
A heat absorbing / dissipating means capable of cooling the air from the blowing means,
The sub-control unit includes a blower control unit that controls the blower unit, controls the heat absorbing / dissipating unit, and sends out the cooled air to the accommodation space.